advertisement
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all the know
− how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
If you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance
D HAWAII:
Servco Automotive Roadside Assistance/Customer Services
Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987
Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987
CANADIAN OWNERS
D
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service Toll−free: 1−800−26−LEXUS or 1−800−265−3987
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
D The U.S. mainland www.lexus.com
D Hawaii www.servcolexus.com
D Canada www.lexus.ca
i
ii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
Safety symbol
THIS MANUAL
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR LEXUS
Occupant restraint systems
Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read
Section 1
−
6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,
Section 1
−
6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important section for you and your family to read.
Section 1
−
6 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is used properly and together with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of collision. However, the more you know about these systems and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1
−
6 of this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1
−
6 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of ownership of this vehicle.
iii
iv
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Position of the transmission selector lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts or not
Driver’s seat position
Front passenger’s occupant classification
SRS airbag deployment data
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control (VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another
EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information:
Behavior of the vehicle
Steering wheel angle
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
To what extent the brake pedal was applied
To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels
Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Lexus will:
Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non
−
Lexus organization for research purposes
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
Important health and safety information about your Lexus
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
v
vi
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non
− genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non
− genuine Lexus products. Modification with non
− genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
If you install any Genuine Accessories such as a bull
− bar, winch, etc., consult your Lexus dealer.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference
−
Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two−way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two
− way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti
− lock brake system, active traction control system, vehicle stability control system, active height control system, adaptive variable suspension system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
Tires and loading on your Lexus
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the excess load may result in the deterioration of steering ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as a fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This check is done several hours after the engine is turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It does not indicate a malfunction.
On−pavement and off−road driving tips
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for off
− road use also. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read
“Off
−
road vehicle precautions” on page 310 and “Off
− road
driving precautions” on page 313.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS vii
viii
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please read this page and the rest of the Owner ’s Manual carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation of your vehicle.
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy reference to the appropriate pages.
BASIC OPERATION − QUICK REFERENCE
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily understandable way for quick reference.
SECTION 1 − INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points you should pay particular attention to.
1. Keys and doors
2. Switches
3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
4. Interior equipment
5. Exterior equipment
6. Occupant restraint systems
7. Steering wheel and mirrors
SECTION 2 − AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can make full use of them.
SECTION 3 − STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything in this section, and remember
−
drive safely!
SECTION 4 − IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire, etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 5 − MAINTENANCE
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
SECTION 6 − SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection and maintenance yourself.
INDEX
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed information when an urgent situation arises.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a considerable amount of information. To use this information most effectively, please take the time to familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the manual.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ix
x
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles with navigation system)
PICTORIAL INDEX
PX602c xi
PICTORIAL INDEX xii
Page Page
1
2
Power window switches
Power door lock switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
22
Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . .
Rear air conditioning switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
4
5
Driving position memory switch
Power quarter window switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
25
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . .
26
7 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
29
Seat heater switches
Ashtray
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Center differential lock switch
Power antenna switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
31
32
33
34
Automatic transmission selector lever
Damping mode select switch
Active height control switch
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second start mode selector switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation system including air conditioning controls (See the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.)
Front passenger occupant classification indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Audio system
. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
37
38
39
40
41
Telephone switches and speech command switch
(See the separate “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.)
Audio remote controls (Steering switches)
Lexus night view system on−off knob
. . . .
. . . . . . . .
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles without navigation system)
PICTORIAL INDEX px609b xiii
xiv
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
1 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Power quarter window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . .
7 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .
10 Center differential lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
Power antenna switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Trip information display
Clock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger occupant classification indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . .
38
39
40
41
35
36
37
32
33
34
29
30
31
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
25
Page
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . .
Rear air conditioning switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
Damping mode select switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second start mode selector switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls (Steering switches) . . . .
Lexus night view system on−off knob
Hood lock release lever
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
PICTORIAL INDEX px500e xv
xvi
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
1 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 “PWR” mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
11
12
13
14
15
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission second start indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
18
19
Lexus night view system warning light . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
35
36
37
32
33
34
38
28
29
30
31
Page
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable gear ratio steering system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unengaged “Park” warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active height control indicator lights . . . . . . . . .
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil replacement reminder light . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system and active traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center differential lock indicator light . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system indicator light .
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . .
Odo/Trip knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in Canada)
PICTORIAL INDEX px504g xvii
xviii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
1 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 “PWR” mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
11
12
13
14
15
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission second start indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
18
19
Lexus night view system warning light . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
35
36
37
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
31
Page
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable gear ratio steering system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unengaged “Park” warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active height control indicator lights . . . . . . . . .
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system
OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system and active traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center differential lock indicator light . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system indicator light .
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . .
Odo/Trip knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
00X003i
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
1 Tilt and telescopic steering adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch . .
3 Seatback angle control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Lumbar support control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
xix
xx
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
px603a
Page
1 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . .
2 Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Windshield wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . .
7 Side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
PICTORIAL INDEX xxi
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Fuel tank capacity:
96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 lmp.gal.)
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Recommended oil viscosity
−
SAE 5W
−
30 if normal temperatures are below 38 C (100 F)
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)
Drain and refill with filter 6.8 (7.2, 6.0) without filter 6.4 (6.8, 5.6)
See page 410 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.) 15.4 (16.3, 13.6)
Coolant type
−
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 413.
Automatic transmission:
Fluid type
−
“Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS”
Tire information:
See page 424 through 443 for detailed information.
Tire inflation pressure:
Tire size: P275/60R18 111H cold tires kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Normal driving
Front tires . . . . . . 200 (2.0, 29)
Rear tires . . . . . . 220 (2.2, 32)
Trailer towing
220 (2.2, 32)
240 (2.4, 35) lxu
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
Seat adjustment
Seat position
Seat cushion angle
00X005c
Seat cushion height
Seatback angle
Lumbar support
Head restraint height
Head restraint angle
2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
00X016f
To tilt the steering column up or down to the desired angle, push the control switch in the required direction and release the button when the steering column reaches the desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
00X015f
To move the steering column to the desired position, push the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until the steering column reaches the desired position.
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
bx500
QUICK REFERENCE
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)*
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking bx501
Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.)
*When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 278.
3
4
QUICK REFERENCE
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
With the ignition OFF
Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
With the engine started and parking brake released
Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
00X017a full intensity.
Automatic light control
Automatic light control
Headlight flasher
High beam
00X008a
Headlight flasher
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Right or left turn
00X010a
Lane change
(Right or left)
QUICK REFERENCE
5. WIPER SWITCH
Front
Automatic operation
1 Low speed operation
00X009e
High speed operation 2
Washer on
Rear
3 Wiper on
(Intermittent operation)
00X011e Wiper on
(Normal operation)
Washer also on 5
6 Washer on
5
6
QUICK REFERENCE
SECTION
1
–
1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
11x503
8
1 Master keys (black) − The master keys work in every lock. For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with a built−in transponder chip, your dealer will need it.
2 Valet key (gray) − The valet key will not open the glove box.
3 Key number plate − Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been placed in the head of the master and valet keys. These chips are required for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the glove box when using valet parking, leave the valet key with the attendant.
Since the side doors and back door can be locked without a key, you should always carry a spare master key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.
Flat key
KEYS AND DOORS
Starting the engine using a flat key
11g039c 11x022b
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start the engine with this key.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is required for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not leave it in your vehicle.
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10 seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light goes out. This means the engine immobilizer system is automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer
system” on page 11.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobilizer system if 10 seconds have passed after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2.
4. Start the engine within 60 seconds after the security indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 60 seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2.
9
10
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate may fall out or become bent also.
The flat key is designed for emergency use only.
11R055
11L021-2
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts.
When starting the engine, do not use the key in proximity with other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles), and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine.
KEYS AND DOORS
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
11G035c
11X514
Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other objects.
Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic materials.
The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled automatically, which enables the engine to start.
The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can cancel the engine immobilizer system using the flat key. (For
details, see “Flat key” on page 9.)
11
12
KEYS AND DOORS
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built
− in transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS
−
210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*
11X013a
1 Locking the doors
2 Unlocking the doors and opening the windows and moon roof
3 Indicator light
4 Sounding an alarm
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote control key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes once.
The operational range of the wireless remote control is approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
KEYS AND DOORS
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be discharged. If this is the case, replace it using a special screwdriver.
The remote control does not work.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes extremely short.
The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come on.
For the replacement of the battery, see “Replacing the battery”
on page 17. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
The wireless remote control key is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key.
Do not leave the wireless remote control key in places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
13
14
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking/Unlocking the doors
When you push the “LOCK” button on the key, all the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle.
At this time, you can hear one beep and turn signal lights flash once.* However, when you push the “LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.**
To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the
“UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch, locking cannot be done.
NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. **The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3 seconds from the first push, all other doors are also unlocked.*
At this time, two beeps sound and turn signal lights flash twice.**
NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
**The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in “DOOR” position.* However, this function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For further
information, see “Interior lights” on page 69.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature.** If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again. This function does not work when the ignition key is inserted.
NOTE: *The interior light can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed. **The time before automatic re−locking can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch and then push again.
Sounding an alarm*
KEYS AND DOORS
Operating the windows and moon roof
The windows and moon roof can be operated using a wireless remote control key from outside the vehicle.*
NOTE: *The windows and moon roof can be deactivated.
The moon roof can be set to slide open or tilt up or deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
11X015d
11x500d
When you push the “PANIC” button for about 1 second, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
If you want to stop the alarm, push “LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or
“PANIC” button for about 1 second.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof start to move. At this time one beep sounds. When you release the button, the windows and moon roof stop operating.
This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in.
15
16
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
KEYS AND DOORS
Replacing the battery
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR2016 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used battery according to the local laws.
11L028−1
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the arrow direction.
11x602
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
11x603
18
3. Open and remove the battery case cover using a coin.
4. Remove the discharged battery and put in a new battery with the positive side up.
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the battery are faced correctly.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the inside of the module.
Take care not to lose the screws.
5. Replace the battery case cover.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover with the screw.
7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure the indicator light comes on.
SIDE DOORS
Locking with key
11X001b
1 Lock 2 Unlock
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and towards the back to unlock.
All the side doors and back door lock and unlock simultaneously with either front door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the side doors and back door simultaneously. In the passenger’s door lock, turning the key once will unlock all the side doors and back door simultaneously.*
NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in “DOOR” position. However, this function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. For further information, see
19
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with inside lock button
11X002a
20
1 Lock 2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle.
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. With the key in the ignition switch and the front door open, the lock knob cannot be moved in the lock position.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.
Locking with power door lock switch
11X003e
1 Lock 2 Unlock
To lock all the side doors and back door simultaneously, push the power door lock switch down on the front side.
Pushing down on the rear side will unlock them.
The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side.
When the front doors are locked from the outside or locked with the wireless remote control transmitter, the power door lock switch will not work until either front door is unlocked with the key, lock button or wireless remote control transmitter.
KEYS AND DOORS
Automatic door locking and unlocking functions
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
You can select the following functions:
Locking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically locked when the selector lever is moved out of “P” position.
Locking linked with vehicle speed
All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed goes above about 20 km/h (12 mph).
You can set or cancel the automatic door locking functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations.
To select the locking linked with the shift position:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
21
22
KEYS AND DOORS
To select the locking linked with the vehicle speed:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
You can select the following functions:
Unlocking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is moved to “P” position.
Unlocking linked with the ignition switch
All doors are automatically unlocked when the the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, or the key is removed.
You can set or cancel the automatic unlocking functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations.
To select the unlocking linked with the shift position:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
To select the unlocking linked with the ignition switch:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
Locking with rear door child−protector
11X004e
1 Lock 2 Unlock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.
To do this, move the lever to the “LOCK” position as shown and then close the door.
KEYS AND DOORS
BACK DOOR
Opening and closing
11X007g
Opening from outside 1 Unlock 2 Lock 3 Open
All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the back door.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
11X008d
24
Opening from inside 1 Unlock 2 Lock 3 Open
The back door can be opened as shown.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 329 for precautions to
observe in loading luggage.
After closing the back door, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed.
Closing the back door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the back door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
The back door lock will be controlled with the power door lock
switch. (For instructions, see “Side doors” on page 19.)
CAUTION
Keep the back door closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Locking with back door child−protector
KEYS AND DOORS
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
11X601a 17x503
1 Lock 2 Unlock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the back door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.
To do this, move the lever to the “LOCK” position as shown and then close the back door.
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and other exterior lights.
25
26
KEYS AND DOORS
17X504
Security indicator light (For vehicles with navigation system)
17X505
Security indicator light (For vehicles without navigation system)
Setting the system
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and remove it.
The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors and hood using an ignition key or wireless remote control.
If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signals flash once.*
NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the system is set.
Cancelling the system
When you unlock any door using an ignition key or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.
If you unlock any door with wireless remote control, the turn signals flash twice.*
NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
Activating the system
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are operated:
Unlocking any door without using an ignition key or wireless remote control.
Opening the hood and any doors forcibly.
Reconnecting the battery.
If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition switch during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
Unlock the door using an ignition key or wireless remote control.
Start the engine, and the alarm stops after 2 seconds.
KEYS AND DOORS
Testing the system
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless remote control to cancel the system.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of information you have set in the computer memory. After reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into the computer once more.
27
28
KEYS AND DOORS
SECTION
1
–
2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
12X001a
Manually twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully on.
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
30
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
However, if the surroundings are bright and if the instrument panel light control dial is not turned fully on, the instrument panel lights do not come on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings.*
Vehicles sold in U.S.A: When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
12X509
The automatic light control sensor is on top of the passenger’s side instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When you turn on the headlights, the lights automatically turn off about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed with the ignition switch turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.* To turn them on again, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.
When the headlight switch is on with all the side doors and back door locked, pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key turns off the headlights.
NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
SWITCHES
Daytime Running Light System
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the “OFF” position. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (“AUTO”), the headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter, the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning off the other lights.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
31
32
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCH
12X003a
12X002a
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is off.
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the conventional manner.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The turn signal is self
− cancelling after a turn, but after a lane change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and holding it there.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
SWITCHES
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
12X014a
12x004g
To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the “ON” position. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
1 Automatic control adjuster 2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“AUTO” position: Automatic operation
The wiper speed is determined by the amount of raindrops detected by the windshield sensor (shown in the illustration), and the vehicle speed.
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
33
34
SWITCHES
Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the sensitivity.
With the ignition switch turned off, if the windshield sensor is touched by reason of cleaning the windshield or for any other reason, either of the following operations may cause automatic wiper activation.
Turning the ignition switch on with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position.
Turning the ignition switch on and move the wiper lever down in the “AUTO” position.
Even with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, the system will switch to intermittent operations if the system malfunctions.
When the system malfunctions, the time interval between sweeps is shortened as the vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster in “+” position, the time interval becomes the shortest 1.5 seconds.
The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 90 C or 194 F) or cold (at less than –30 C or
–22 F).
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the wipers and windshield.
When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the ignition switch on, the wipers could operate automatically in the following cases:
If you touch the upper center of the windshield adjacent to the sensor.
If you wipe the upper center of the windshield
(adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.
If the windshield vibrates.
If you touch the sensor.
If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position, the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work when the interval adjuster is in the “+” position.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and release it.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed.
The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about 170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE: *The last single wipe can be deactivated. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.
For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision.
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the wipers.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure the washer nozzles do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced.
SWITCHES
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
35
36
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
12X009b
1 Washer on during wiping 2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, twist the knob at the end of the lever.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 2 settings:
“LO” position: Intermittent operation
“HI” position: Normal operation
If you stop the vehicle with the rear window wiper switch in the
“ON” position, the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to intermittent operation speed.
If you shift the selector lever to the “R” position while the windshield wipers are operating or for 17 seconds after the windshield wipers stop operating, the rear window wiper will activate once.*
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
To make the washer squirt, twist the knob downward to position 2.
The rear wiper will automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to sweep the rear window completely.
To make the washer squirt while operating in “ON” position, twist the knob upward to position 1.
The knob automatically returns from these positions after you release it.
If the rear window wiper is off, it will operate a couple of times after the washer squirt.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.
For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer
NOTICE
Do not operate the rear window wiper if the rear window is dry. It may scratch the glass.
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
(CANADA ONLY)
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SWITCH
12X015d 12X514a
To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the headlights on.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.
For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer
NOTICE
Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to overheat.
To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window will quickly clear the surface. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop
− and
− go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow.
37
38
SWITCHES
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the engine is not running.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
DEFOGGER SWITCH
12X500a
To turn the electric outside rear view mirror defogger on, push the switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the switch is on. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes.
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop
− and
− go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de
− icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the engine is not running.
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
12X006f
1 For driver’s window
2 For front passenger’s window
3 For left rear window
4 For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by the switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
Retained accessory power: Even if the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the window can be operated until either of the front doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
39
40
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
12L010
12X007g
Operating the switches
To raise or lower the window, pull the switch halfway up or push it halfway down.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.
Indicator light
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches can be operated.
Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will be opened from outside the vehicle using an ignition key or wireless remote control.
Operating the windows from outside the vehicle
The windows can be operated using an ignition key.*
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
11x507
Insert the ignition key into the keyhole on the driver’s side.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it.
After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop in the middle, return the key.
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop in the middle, return the key.
This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in.
SWITCHES
Jam protection function
If something gets caught between the window and window frame during automatic raising operation, retained accessory power raising operation or raising operation using the ignition key from outside, the window stops and is lowered.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.
Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.
41
42
SWITCHES
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could result in a serious injury.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closed.
POWER QUARTER WINDOW
SWITCH
12X023c
1 For the left quarter window
2 For the right quarter window
The quarter windows can be operated with the “REAR
VENT” switch on the instrument panel.
To open: Push the right side of the switch.
To close: Push the left side of the switch.
Both the left and the right quarter windows move as long as you hold the switch.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.
Always make sure the hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle before you close the power quarter windows. If someone’s hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power quarter windows, make sure he/she operates the windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power rear quarter window switches without supervision.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power quarter window switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.
SWITCHES
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
12X503a
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will work with the engine running or off and with or without the ignition key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are in operation.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
43
44
SWITCHES
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
12X025c
1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat
3 High heating temperature
4 Low heating temperature
To turn on the seat heater, push the switch to “HI” (high temperature) or “LO” (low heating temperature). To turn off the seat heater, push the switch lightly on the opposite side. At this time, the indicator light on either side will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position to operate seat heaters.
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or persons with physical disabilities
Persons who have sensitive skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
ROLL SENSING OF CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS OFF SWITCH
12x600a
The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch can turn off the curtain shield airbags and front seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle rollover. This switch should only be used in a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme offroad driving).
When you push the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch for a few seconds with the ignition switch on, the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light comes on and the roll sensing function is turned off. When you push the switch again, the indicator light goes off and the roll sensing function is turned on.
SWITCHES
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield airbag on the impacted side will inflate even if the roll sensing function is turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” with the roll sensing function off and then the ignition switch is turned back to “ON”, the roll sensing function will be back on automatically.
For details, see “Seat belt pretensioners” on page 130 or “SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on page 144.
CAUTION
Make sure the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is not on.
When the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch is turned on (and the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is on), the curtain shield airbags and front seat belt pretensioners will not inflate in a vehicle rollover. Turning off the curtain shield airbags can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of death or serious injuries.
45
46
SWITCHES
SECTION
1
–
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
48
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended fuel selection.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
13X500
13X501
Low fuel level warning light
The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop
− and
− go traffic.
Towing a trailer.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
13X623
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 338.
1 Normal driving 2 Idling
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates engine oil pressure when the ignition is on. Check it while driving to make sure the needle is in the proper range.
If the engine oil pressure should stay below the normal range, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
Engine oil pressure may not build up when the engine oil level is too low. The engine oil pressure gauge is not designed to indicate engine oil level, and the engine oil level must be checked using the level dipstick.
49
50
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the engine oil pressure below the normal range until the cause is fixed − it may ruin the engine.
VOLTMETER
13X503a
1 Normal range 2 Charging system warning light
The voltmeter tells whether the battery is charged or discharged. Check it while the engine is running − the needle should always indicate as shown above.
If the needle reads below or above the normal range while the engine is running, it indicates the charging system needs immediate repair.
However, it is normal for the needle to drop below the normal range during engine starting.
TACHOMETER
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
13X504c 13X505
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to prevent engine over−revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage.
“ODO/TRIP” knob
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To change the mode indication, push the “ODO/TRIP” knob briefly. Each time you push the knob, the mode changes in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B, then back to the odometer, etc.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip meter records two different distances independently.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, push the knob and hold it. The same applies for the B trip meter.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.
51
52
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
(f)
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
or
(a) or
(Indicator and buzzer)
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer.
(g) or
(b)
(Indicator and buzzer)
Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(c)
Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(d)
Take vehicle to Lexus dealer immediately.
(e)
214
Replace engine oil.
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
WG6
DO THIS.
Take vehicle to Lexus dealer.
Take vehicle to Lexus dealer.
If the brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer.
Close all doors.
Adjust tire inflation pressure.
If light remains on, contact Lexus dealer.
Shift four
− wheel drive control out of “N”.
Stop and check.
(l)
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
and w73z
(m)
218
DO THIS.
Take vehicle to Lexus dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
(q) Add washer fluid.
Take vehicle to Lexus dealer.
(r)
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
(n)
213
Replace bulb.
(o)
Stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer.
(p) Fill up tank.
53
54
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
When the parking brake is applied ...
This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is in the “ON” position even after the parking brake is released.
When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.
When the hydraulic brake booster fails ...
If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously.
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the following cases:
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.
The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light.
In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.
The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail, but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light continues flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle up the seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light continues flashing.
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built
− in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to flash.
55
56
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(d) SRS Warning Light
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
The SRS warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant cassification system and indicator light, front passenger seat belt buckle switch, inflators, seat belt pretensioners, roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
(e) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder Light
(U.S.A. only)
The light acts as a reminder to replace the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after about a few seconds.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500 miles) after the engine oil replacement, this light illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds with the ignition key turned to “ON” position. If you continue driving without the engine oil replacement, and if the driving range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light will come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON” position. The light will remain on thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that you replace the engine oil at an early opportunity depending on the driving and road condition. If the light comes on, replace it as soon as possible.
You need to reset the light after the engine oil replacement.
Reset the light by following the procedure below:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position with the odometer reading shown. (For details, see “Odometer and trip
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position while holding down the “ODO/TRIP” knob.
Hold down the knob until the light goes off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and illuminates for 1 second.
If the system fails to reset, the light will remain flashing. In this case, return to step 1 and try again.
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the following:
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On
−
Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M)
57
58
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(g) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti
− lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti
− lock brake system, the brake assist system, the active traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti
− lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
(h) Open Door Warning Light
This light remains on until all the side doors and back door are completely closed.
(i) Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the tire pressure warning system works properly and tire inflation pressure is appropriate, the light goes off after a few seconds.
This light comes on or flashes in the following cases when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while driving...
If any tire has low inflation pressure, the light comes on.
The light goes off after the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to a specified level.
When initializing the system...
If initialization is completed, the light blinks three times.
When the system malfunctions...
If the system malfunctions, the light blinks.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(j) Unengaged “Park” Warning Light
This light warns that the transmission “Park” mechanism is not engaged. If the four
− wheel drive control is in the “N” position while the selector lever is in the “P” position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock.
CAUTION
To restore the park function, shift the four−wheel drive control out of “N”.
(k) Automatic Transmission Fluid
Temperature Warning Light
This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the selector lever in “P” and leave the engine idling until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you can start the vehicle again.
If the light does not go off, call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning light on may damage the automatic transmission.
59
60
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(l) Vehicle Stability Control System and
Active Traction Control System Warning
Light
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system and active traction control system.
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as possible. However, it is no problem that the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes on when the brake actuator temperature becomes high. (For details, see “Active traction control
The lights will stay on with the ignition key turned to “ON”, and will go off after about a few seconds.
The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.
It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.
When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system and/or active traction control system do not operate, but there is no problem to continue your driving.
(m) Variable Gear Ratio Steering System
Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the variable gear ratio steering system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the system is not working.
Although conventional steering operates when maneuvered, a larger degree of wheel maneuvering (than at the time when the system is functioning properly) is needed when driving at low speed. At this time, the center position of the steering wheel could be changed. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle repaired at your Lexus dealer.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
The light will flash if you disconnect and reconnect the battery terminal. This is because the system is reset temporarily.
However, it is no problem to drive. To turn off the light, drive for a short while. The system will be set automatically and return to normal.
(n) Lexus Night View System Warning Light
When this light comes on, the bulb for the near
− infrared floodlight (night view projector) is burned out. Have it replaced at Lexus dealer.
(o) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off when the engine is started.
When there are problems in the charging system while the engine is running, the warning light comes on.
NOTICE
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
When the charging system warning light comes on while the engine is running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have occurred. If the warning light comes on, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
(p) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
(q) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
(r) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove the key when you open the driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
61
62
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
How to check all the service reminder indicators
(except the low fuel level warning light):
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open the door.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you close the door completely.
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
222 w73 w72a
214
218
3. Place the four
− wheel drive control lever in “N” position and the selector lever in “P” position and turn the ignition key to
“ACC”.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you place the four
− wheel drive control lever in
“H” or “L” position.
wtrac or w227 or w16 or or
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds.
w73 w72a
218
TRIP INFORMATION DISPLAY
(Vehicles without navigation system)
214
wtrac or w227
13x541z or
The following service reminder indicator goes off after about 6 seconds.
The anti
− lock brake system warning light, vehicle stability control system off indicator light and vehicle stability control system and active traction control system warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The following information is shown with the ignition switch turned on. Each time you push the “MODE” button, the displayed information is changed.
Average vehicle speed
Driving distance after engine starting
Available driving range
Average fuel consumption after being refueled
Current fuel consumption
The displayed trip information values indicate the general driving condition and may not always reflect precise and actual conditions.
63
222
64
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Average vehicle speed Driving distance after engine starting
13x543z
The average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total driving time with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 second.
13x545
The driving distance after engine starting is displayed.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 second.
Available driving range
13x547
The available driving range is calculated and displayed depending on the amount of remaining fuel.
Average fuel consumption after refueling
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Current fuel consumption
13x552
The average fuel consumption after refueling is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total fuel consumption after refueling.
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the ignition switch off.
13x554
The current fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on the driving distance and the fuel consumption per 2 second interval with the engine running.
The value is updated every 2 seconds.
If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the accurate figure may not be shown.
65
66
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
13x531a
13X019
The unit shown on the display can be changed using the following procedure:
1. Hold down the “MODE” button until the unit flashes.
2. Push the “RESET” button to change the unit.
3. Push the “MODE” button.
When you change the unit shown on the trip information display, the unit on the outside temperature display is also changed.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial.
When the surroundings are dark and when the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop, you can also adjust the brightness of the displays on the clock and audio and air conditioning systems using this dial.
SECTION
1
–
4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
68
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
VANITY MIRRORS
Sun visors
14X002c 14X012b
To use the vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down and open the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you open the cover.
1 To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor down.
2 To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the hook and swing it to the side.
3 To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you, slide the visor backwards.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
4 To block out glare from the front with the sun visor in the position 2 or 3 , swing the other sun visor down.
Front
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the other doors are locked.
NOTE: * The interior lights can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Rear
14X081
14X002
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
With the switch in the “DOOR” position, the light comes on when any door is opened or when the ignition key is turned to
“LOCK”. After all the doors are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds and then goes out.*
However, in the following cases, the light goes out immediately:
1. All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in “ACC” or
“ON” position.
2. The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “ON” when the light is still on.
3. All the doors are locked when the light is still on.
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
With the switch in the “DOOR” position, the light comes on when the rear door or back door is opened. The light goes out immediately when the rear door and back door are closed.
69
70
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL LIGHTS
Front
14X082b
Rear
14X083
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch on the opposite side.
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CLOCK
14X004a 14X500
For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors are opened.
The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after all the doors are closed. However, the light goes out immediately when all the doors are locked or the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The digital clock indicates the time when the ignition key is at the “ACC” or “ON” position. To reset the hour, press the “H” button. To reset the minutes, press the “M” button. To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the
“:00” button.
For example, if the “:00” button is pressed when the time is between 9:30
−
9:59 or between 10:01
−
10:29, the time will change to 10:00.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
When the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop, you can also adjust the brightness of the display using the instrument panel light control dial.
71
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Front
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
14X501
14X006c
72
This display shows the outside temperature when the ignition switch is on.
The displayed temperature ranges from
−
30 C (
−
22 F) up to
50 C (122 F). If the temperature does not appear on the display or it shows “
− −
”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
When the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop, you can also adjust the brightness of the display using the instrument panel light control dial.
The unit shown on the display can be changed. For details,
see “Trip information display” on page 63.
To use the cigarette lighter, press in the cigarette lighter.
After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the
“ACC” position to use the lighter.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
To remove the ashtray, press down on the lock spring plate and pull out.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray completely after use.
Rear
14X603
To use the ashtray, pull on the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray completely after use.
73
74
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
14X025a
1 Snuffer bridge
To use the ashtray, pull on the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressing on the snuffer bridge to release the catch.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray completely after use.
Front
POWER OUTLETS
14X017a
14X029c
Vehicles without
Navigation System
Vehicles with
Navigation System
Rear
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.
REAR CONSOLE BOX
14X603
The power outlets are designed for power supply for car accessories.
The ignition key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for the power outlets to be used.
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W
(front and rear outlets together).
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
14X074
1 For upper box 2 For lower box
To use the rear console box, open as shown in the illustration.
75
76
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GLOVE BOX
14X007a
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener ( Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc.
(a) Programming the HomeLink
1 Unlock 2 Open 3 Lock
To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the glove box door, insert the master key and turn it clockwise.
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the glove box door is open.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.
14X517
1 Buttons 2 Indicator light
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink , install a new battery in the hand
− held transmitter prior to programming.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
The battery side of the hand
− held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
14x608
14x607
1 HomeLink 2 Hand−held garage transmitter
3 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
2. Place your hand
− held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink .
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand
− held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.
77
78
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
14x609
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink ) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink ” before proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the garage door up/down.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another rolling code system.
Programming an entrance gate /
Programming all devices in the Canadian market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place your hand
− held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink .
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand
− held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLink ”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink , press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
79
80
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory
(all three programs)
14x610
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS
−
210 of the IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC
Rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user ’s authority to operate the device.
Front
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CUPHOLDERS
14X057d
Separator
To use a cupholder, push the cupholder lid.
The cupholder can be adjusted to the size of the cups by changing the separator position or moving the separator arms.
You can use it as an accessory box by removing the separator inside.
81
82
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rear
14X080a
14X020b
To use a cupholder in the console box,
1. Open the console box lid. Pull down the knob so that the cupholder swings down.
2. While holding the console box lid with your hand, push down the cupholder to be secured.
NOTICE
When you use the cupholder in the console box, make sure it is securely locked.
Do not rest your arm on the cupholder in the console box.
Wipe up spilt drink at once.
Rear end of the rear console
14X024
Left−side trim panel near the third seat
To use the cupholder, push or pull out the cupholder lid.
14X076
Right−side trim panel near the third seat
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder closed when not in use.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
AUXILIARY BOXES
Your vehicle has several types of auxiliary box. To use them, open as shown in the following illustrations.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving.
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
14x605
Overhead console
83
84
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rear right side
14X039a
Rear right side
14X040a
CARD HOLDER
14x504
You can store a card in the slot as shown in the illustration.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FLOOR MAT
14X009a
14X008d
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock the clips into the holes in the vehicle carpet.
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.
85
86
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COAT HOOKS WARNING REFLECTOR HOLDER
14x505 14X079
To use the coat hook, push the hook.
CAUTION
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
This auxiliary box is equipped with a band to hold the warning reflector.
Although the warning reflector itself is not included as original equipment, this auxiliary box can be used to store the warning reflector.
Hold the warning reflector with a band.
Make sure the warning reflector is securely held.
TIE−DOWN HOOKS
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CARGO NET HOOKS
14X604 14X601
To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.
For precautions to observe in loading luggage, see “Cargo and
These hooks are designed to hang the cargo net.
To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks and rear tie
− down hooks.
Although the cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment, these hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the hook, avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.
87
88
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FIRST AID KIT HOLDER ROOF LUGGAGE CARRIER
14X078 14x506a
This auxiliary box is equipped with a band to hold the first aid kit.
Although the first aid kit itself is not included as original equipment, this auxiliary box can be used to store the first aid kit.
Hold the first aid kit with a band.
Make sure the first aid kit is securely held.
1 Cross rails 2 Roof rails
The roof luggage carrier consists of roof rails and sliding cross rails.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Adjusting the position of cross rails
14x508a
14x507a
1 Side knobs 2 Upper knob
1. Turn the upper and side knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.
2. Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading the luggages and turn the side knobs clockwise to tighten the cross rails securely.
There are cross rail stoppers on the roof rails which help you prevent the cross rails being touched with the tilted
− up moon roof.
NOTICE
Do not remove the cross rail stoppers, or the moon roof may be damaged when it is tilted.
89
90
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
14x509a
3. In order to fix the cross rails to the appropriate length, turn the upper knobs clockwise after tightening all the side knobs.
CAUTION
Make sure the cross rails are fixed securely by pushing forward and rearward them. Failure to do so may cause an accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions when installing the attachments or their equivalent.
CAUTION
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.
If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (See “Specifications”
on page 463 for information on your vehicle overall
length and width.
Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
Do not exceed 70 kg (143 lb.) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
When loading the luggages, be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
SECTION
1
–
5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
92
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
15X014c
15X001a
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FUEL TANK CAP
15X003a
15x500
The arrow head next to as shown indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever under the instrument panel.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly removed.
93
94
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
15X004a
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it.
The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure.
MOON ROOF
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To close the moon roof, push the switch on the front side.
The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push the same switch or “TILT” switch.
15X016e
15X017e
1 Open 2 Close
To slide open the moon roof, push the “SLIDE” switch on the rear side. The moon roof will open and stop partway
30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push the switch again, the moon roof will open fully. To stop partway, push the same switch or push the “TILT” switch while the moon roof is moving.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway
30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened position.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However, if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with the moon roof.
1 Tilt up 2 Lower
To tilt up the rear end of the moon roof, push the “TILT” switch on the “UP” side. The rear end of the moon roof will tilt up fully. To stop partway, push the same switch or
“SLIDE” switch.
To lower it, push the switch on the opposite side of the
“UP” side. The rear end of the moon roof will fully close.
To stop partway, push the same switch or “SLIDE” switch.
Retained accessory power: Even if the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the moon roof can be operated until either of the front doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
95
96
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Operating the moon roof from outside the vehicle
The moon roof can be closed or opened using a key.*
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it.
After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop in the middle, return the key.
To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To stop in the middle, return the key.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated, or sliding open/close or tilting up/down can be selected. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
Jam protection function
If something gets caught into the roof opening during closing operation, the moon roof stops and is open.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.
If the battery terminal is disconnected or the battery is run down
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not operate correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery with the moon roof slide
− opened or tilted up. In any of these cases, you should return the moon roof to normal. To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the “SLIDE” switch or “TILT” switch on the front side until the moon roof is closed completely.
Make sure the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in a moon roof. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening.
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could result in a serious injury.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closed.
97
98
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR STEP BUMPER RUNNING BOARD LIGHTS
15X600b 15x019b
The rear step bumper is for rear end protection and easier step−up loading.
CAUTION
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time. It is designed for only one person.
Never drive the vehicle with anyone on the rear step bumper.
Lighting the running board and the ground helps you easily to get in and out of the vehicle in the night.
When you unlock any door with a key or wireless remote control, the lights come on and go out after about 15 seconds automatically.
Opening any door lights up the lights and closing it goes out them after 15 seconds. However, if the door remains open, the lights automatically go out after about 30 minutes.
Cleaning ground lights
15X020
Ground light
If the mud or debris are sticking on the lense covers of the ground lights, the lights will dim. Wipe off them from the lens covers with a soft moist cloth periodically.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
99
100
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
SECTION
1
–
6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger occupant classification system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving position memory system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
102
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Driver seat
CAUTION
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.
This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by
NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
Do not use seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the front seat, or do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. Such accessories or changes may prevent the front passenger airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the front passenger airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Front seats
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or severely injured.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats with side airbags. Such change may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system, or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
103
104
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat adjustment precautions
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
Adjusting front seats
16X001c
1 Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle and height control switch
2 Seatback angle control switch
3 Lumbar support control switch
Adjusting seat position
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seatback angle
16X002c 16X003c
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the seat movement.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.
105
106
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height Adjusting lumbar support
16X004d 16X005c
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.
REAR SEATS
Rear seat precautions
CAUTION
Adjustment should not be made while the vehicle is moving.
When folding the seat, secure the seat by adjusting the length of the anchorage strap to prevent the seat from falling down.
When returning the seat to its original position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop.
There is no person or luggage around the seat and operate slowly by supporting the seat with your hands.
The seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
The seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.
When using the seat, make sure the seat is securely locked.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
Avoid putting heavy loads on the removed seat. The metallic tips of the seat legs may be damaged and the seat cannot be reinstalled.
Tumbling or removing the seats will enlarge the luggage
compartment. See “Cargo and luggage” on page 329 for
precautions to observe for loading luggage.
Adjusting rear seats
Second seat
16X644
107
108
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Tumbling second seat for third seat entry
16X185b
16X186b
Third seat
Lean forward and pull the lock release lever. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection when the passengers are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.
For easy access to the third seat, tumble the second seat in accordance with the following procedure.
Before tumbling the second seat, stow the second seat buckles as shown in the illustration.
This prevents the buckles from falling out when you tumble the second seat.
NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you tumble the second seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. To return it to the original position, reverse the steps above.
16X646
16x248a
1. Lower the head restraints to the lowest position, unlock the seatback by pulling the lever on the side of the seatback and fold it down.
16X188c
2. Pull the lever under the seat cushion or pull the strap on the rear end of the seat cushion and swing the whole seat forward.
If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not try it hard. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way.
1 Push in the lower front edge of the seatback cushion to slacken the seat belt.
2 Let the seat belt retract a little.
CAUTION
Do not sit on or place anything on the tumbled seatback while driving.
Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion.
Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
109
110
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Tumbling second seat
16X646
16X186b
Before tumbling the second seat, stow the second seat buckles as shown in the illustration.
This prevents the buckles from falling out when you tumble the second seat.
NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you tumble the second seat.
1. Lower the head restraints to the lowest position, unlock the seatback by pulling the lever on the side of the seatback and fold it down.
16X188c
2. Pull the lever under the seat cushion or pull the strap on the rear end of the seat cushion and swing the whole seat forward.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X189d 16x556
3. Hook the holding strap to the assist grip and secure the seat by pulling its free end.
When returning the second seat to its original position, put the holding strap into the pocket.
4. Remove the seat hook covers from the back of the seat cushion, and install them on the seat hooks.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned when they become hot.
When returning the second seat to its original position, remove the seat hook covers from the floor and install them in the back of the seat cushion.
5. To return it to the original position, reverse the steps above.
111
112
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Tumbling third seat
16x248a
16X190b
If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not try it hard. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way.
1 Push in the lower front edge of the seatback cushion to slacken the seat belt.
2 Let the seat belt retract a little.
CAUTION
Do not sit on or place anything on the tumbled seatback while driving.
Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion.
Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
Before tumbling the third seats, stow the third seat belt and buckles as shown in the illustration.
This prevents the belt and buckles from falling out when you tumble the third seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X233 16x623
Seat belt hanger
For the outer seat belts, use the seat belt hangers to prevent the belts from being tangled.
NOTICE
The seat belts must be stowed before you tumble the third seat.
Make sure to stow the third center seat belt in order not to cause damage on the seat belt by pinching it between the third seat inner leg and seat striker.
113
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
114
16X192c 16X194d
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. Pull the reclining lever up and fold down the seatback.
3. Hook the holding strap to the assist grip and secure the seat by pulling its free end.
16X193g
2. While turning the lever, lift and slide the whole seat backward.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X624 16X195c
4. Remove the seat hook covers from the back of the seat cushion and install them onto the seat anchor brackets.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned when they become hot.
When returning the third seat to its original position, stow the holding strap and the seat hook covers into the holder facing the direction shown in the illustration.
5. To return it to the original position, reverse the steps above.
CAUTION
Do not sit on or place anything on the tumbled seatback while driving.
Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion.
Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
115
116
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Removing third seats
16X233
16X190a
Before removing the third seats, stow the third seat belt and buckles as shown in the illustration.
This prevents the belt and buckles from falling out when you tumble the third seat.
Seat belt hanger
For the outer seat belts, use the seat belt hangers to prevent the belts from being tangled.
NOTICE
The seat belts must be stowed before you tumble the third seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X623 16X192c
Make sure to stow the third center seat belt in order not to cause damage on the seat belt by pinching it between the third seat inner leg and seat striker.
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. Pull the reclining lever up and fold down the seatback.
16X193g
2. While turning the lever, lift and slide the whole seat backward.
117
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X196c 16X238d
118
3. Remove the lever cover and pull the lock release lever.
Lift up the rear side of the seat and pull the whole seat backward.
4. Remove the seat hook covers from the back of the seat cushion and install them onto the seat anchor brackets.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned when they become hot.
5. To reinstall it, reverse the steps above.
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the seat, observe the following precautions to prevent personal injury:
Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
Be careful not to hit the removed seat against a person or drop it on yourself.
CAUTION
To prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop;
You must install the removed seat back in its original position.
Do not sit on or place anything on the tumbled seatback while driving.
Do not leave the removed seat loose in the vehicle.
Do not try to sit on or place anything on the removed seat.
Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
NOTICE
Avoid putting heavy loads on the removed seat. The metallic tips of the seat legs may be damaged and the seat cannot be reinstalled.
Front seat
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
HEAD RESTRAINTS
16X011b
For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.
119
120
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Second and third seats
16X160a
Second seat Third seat
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
ARMREST
16X183b
To use the armrest, pull it down as shown above.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy loads on it.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 162 for
details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not provide sufficient restraint.
121
122
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people − even children.
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or doors.
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into contact with the belts − they may severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the
interior” on page 467 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Fastening front, second and third (outside seats) seat belts
16X017c
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on
page 162.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury.
123
124
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X018d 16X019d
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips
−
not on your waist.
2 Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate.
CAUTION
Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hip as possible.
Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the shoulder anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock release button then slide the anchor down. After the adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Third (center seat) seat belt
16X020c
16X214
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
If the belt is not long enough for you, hold the tab at a right angle to the belt and pull on the tab.
125
126
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury.
16X215
Remove excess length of the belt and adjust the belt position.
To shorten the belt, pull the free end of the belt.
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips
−
not on your waist, then adjust it to a snug fit.
CAUTION
High−positioned and loose−fitting lap belt could cause severe injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hip as possible.
16X216
To release the belt, press the buckle release button.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing the chance of death or serious injury.
Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one originally intended.
127
128
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x560
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle without the driver actually wearing the seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing it. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
Make sure the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates “ON” when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the indicator light indicates “ON”. If you use the seat belt extender while the indicator light indicates “OFF”, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
Do not use the seat belt extender if it is not absolutely necessary.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.
16X024e
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
As far as the seat belt extender on the front passenger side is concerned, do not fail to disconnect the extender from the seat belt after the above operation in order to activate the front passenger airbag correctly when getting into the vehicle next time.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury.
129
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt pretensioners
16x503b
16X620
130
The driver and front passenger seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact or a vehicle rollover.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact or a vehicle rollover, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly restrain the occupants.
The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is detected in the front passenger seat by the front passenger occupant classification system. However, the front passenger ’s seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see page
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light
The seat belt pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle rollover if the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is on. For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Make sure the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is not on.
When the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch is turned on (and the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is on), the seat belt pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle rollover and turning off the seat belt pretensioners can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of death or serious personal injuries.
16X676a
1 Airbag sensor assembly
2 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
3 SRS warning light
4 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
5 Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6 Front airbag sensors
The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of non
− toxic gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This gas is normally harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.
131
132
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size. Such a use may cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. For details, see “Checking
and replacing tires” on page 438.
Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the roof luggage carrier. Such luggage may cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. For details, see “Roof luggage carrier” on
Do not modify or change the suspension system.
Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer before performing any repair and modification.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the seat belt pretensioners in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Repairs on or near the seat belt retractor assemblies.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console.
16x502a
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 52.)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt pretensioner.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged.
The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
133
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
134
16X600
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
Front airbags
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVA NCED AIRBAG S” designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards
(FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor, etc. The f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ’s a i r b a g s y s t e m c o n s i s t s o f t h e f r o n t passenger occupant classification sensor, etc.
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The
SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s y s t e m , s e e “ F r o n t p a s s e n g e r o c c u p a n t
classification system” on page 157.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 121.
135
136
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 162.
The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe
(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X028a 16X245
1 Collision from the side
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS front airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision.
But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags may occur.
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a severe impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
137
138
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x604b
1 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
2 Airbag sensor assembly
3 Front passenger occupant classification indicator light
4 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
5 SRS warning light
6 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
7 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
8 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
9 Driver’s seat position sensor
10 Front airbag sensors
The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors.
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non
− toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non
− toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.
This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that:
The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt when using the extender in the driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page
139
140
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X032a 16X033b
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 162.
16X655a
Do not put anything or any parts of your body on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the driver and front passenger airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components, such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag cover, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Do not use seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the front seat, or do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. Such accessories or changes may prevent the front passenger airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the front passenger airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with a physical disability, consult your Lexus dealer. It may dangerously interfere with the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.
141
142
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or front seats.
16x502a
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 52.)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
16x605b
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.
143
144
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS
16x606
1 Curtain shield airbag 2 Side airbag
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver, front and second seat passengers in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags works with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, front passenger’s or second seat passenger’s head and can help the driver, front passenger and second seat passengers to retain inside the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see “Front
passenger occupant classification system” on page 157.)
Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the curtain shield airbags on both sides inflate. The curtain shield airbags work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s head, front passenger’s head and second seat passengers’ heads and can help the driver, front passenger and second seat passengers to retain inside the vehicle.
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side is activated even with no passenger in the front seat or second seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front and second outboard seat passenger seat belt systems. The front and second seat occupants can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver, front passenger or second seat passenger can move forward or sideways into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbags could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.
145
146
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 162.
12x600a
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch
The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch can turn off the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover.
This switch should only be used in a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme offroad driving).
When you push the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch for a few seconds with the ignition switch on, the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light comes on and the roll sensing function is turned off. When you push the switch again, the indicator light goes off and the roll sensing function is turned on.
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield airbag on the impacted side will inflate even if the roll sensing function is turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” with the roll sensing function off and then the ignition switch is turned back to “ON”, the roll sensing function will be back on automatically.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Make sure the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is not on.
When the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch is turned on (and the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light is on), the curtain shield airbags will not inflate in a vehicle rollover.
Turning off the curtain shield airbags can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of death or serious injuries.
16x526
1 Collision from the side at an angle
2 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.
The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
147
148
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x527 16X501a
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed side collision.
1 The angle of vehicle tip−up is marginal
2 Skidding vehicle hitting a curb stone
The SRS curtain shield airbags may inflate if the angle of vehicle tip−up is marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown in the illustration.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X500
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Pitching end over end
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it pitches end over end or if it is involved in a low−speed side collision.
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags may deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
149
150
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x607c
1 Curtain shield airbag module (airbag and inflator)
2 Side airbag module (airbag and inflator)
3 Front passenger occupant classification indicator light
4 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
5 SRS warning light
6 Curtain shield airbag sensor assembly
7 Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assembly
8 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
9 Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors.
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators.
In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag inflator. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non
− toxic gas to help restrain the forward or lateral motion of the front and second seat occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non
− toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once.
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passengers must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their backs upright and against the seats at all times.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x520a
Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a side airbag,and to the front pillar, rear pillar, and roof side rail with a curtain shield airbag.
Improper sitting and wearing of the seat belts may not retain you inside the vehicle.
151
152
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x503b 16x522a
Make sure the roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator is not on. If this indicator light is on, the curtain shield airbags will not inflate in a vehicle rollover and you may be killed or seriously injured.
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head close to the area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x613 16x509a
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out of windows since the curtain shield airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Do not attach a cupholder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cupholder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
153
154
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x512a
Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object around the area where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front, center and roof side garnish, roof interior or assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, which could result in death or serious injury. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats with side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars and roof side rail containing the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not modify or change the suspension system.
Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or serious injury.
Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size. Such a use may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or serious injury. For details, see “Checking and replacing
Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the roof luggage carrier. Such luggage may cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could cause in death or serious injury. For details,
see “Roof luggage carrier” on page 88.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with a physical disability, consult your Lexus dealer. It may dangerously interfere with the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Modification of the side structure of the passenger compartment.
Repairs made on or near the console, or front seats.
16x502a
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system and indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 52.)
155
156
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
16x608a
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:
Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.
The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) were involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The surface of the seats with the side airbags (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front, center and rear pillar garnish, roof interior containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FRONT PASSENGER OCCUPANT
CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions
1. through 4. in the table on page 160 and based on these
conditions activates or deactivates the following systems;
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
The system monitors the weight and load on the front passenger seat, and the seat belt buckle switch to determine conditions 1. through 4.
In order for the system to detect the conditions correctly, do not do any of the following:
Apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment
(e.g. armrest).
Attach a commercial seatback table, etc. to the front passenger seatback.
Put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the seatback from the rear passenger seat.
157
158
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates the actuation of the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger seat and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The indicator light will indicate “OFF” when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the condition 2 in the table shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of adult size sits in the front passenger seat but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one of the following is likely to have occurred:
A rear passenger lifts the front passenger seat cushion with their legs.
Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.
The front passenger seatback is in contact with the rear seat.
To ensure the system correctly detects an adult sitting in the front passenger seat, make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illuminated when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat. If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
The front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “ON” and “OFF” when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. After about 4 seconds, it will go off. After about 2 seconds, the front passenger occupant classification system operates and judges whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.
The SRS warning light will come on and front passenger occupant classification indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
159
160
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Condition detected by the front passenger occupant classification system
1. Adult *1
2. Child *2 or
child restraint system *3
Front passenger occupant classification indicator light
“ON”
Indicator/ warning light
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Flashing *4
“OFF” Off Flashing *4
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
3. Unoccupied
Not illuminated
Off Off Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
4. There is a malfunction in the system
“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated
*1 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3 : Never install a rear
− facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward
− facing child restraint system should only
restraint system.)
*4 : When the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not detect the conditions correctly, observe the following:
Make sure the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates “ON” when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the indicator light indicates “ON”. If you use the seat belt extender while the indicator light indicates “OFF”, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “OFF” indicator to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the second seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touches the second seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the occupant classification indicator light should indicate “ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the second seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. armrest).
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seatback from the second seat.
Do not let a second seat passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
161
162
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When it is unavoidable to install the forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (As for the installation order, see “Installation with 3−point type
Do not remove the front seats.
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
The front passenger occupant classification indicator light may indicate “ON” when a child sits in, or a forward
− facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. If the
“OFF” indicator is not illuminated in these circumstances, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger side are in an active condition—the airbags will deploy if an impact meets the deployment criteria. Refer to all the cautions in this section, and “Child restraint” that follows.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 121 for details.
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint depending on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a stop or accident.
163
164
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
Types of child restraint system
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 184.
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
(A) Infant seat
16X103b
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
16X104b
16X105b
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Installation with 2−point type seat belt
(A) Infant seat installation
16X217a
An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.
165
166
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x609 16X218
CAUTION
Do not install a rear−facing child restraint system on the third seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the second seats. Otherwise, the child or second seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
Child restraint systems installed on the third seat should not contact the second seat backs.
1. Run the center lap belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the lap belt.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X219 16X220
2. When pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling its free end to hold the infant seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
167
168
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
16X221a
16X222
3. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button.
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing and rear−facing positions depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as directions for installing a child restraint system.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x610 16X223a
CAUTION
Do not install a rear−facing child restraint system on the third seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the second seats. Otherwise, the child or second seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
Child restraint systems installed on the third seat should not contact the second seat backs.
1. Run the center lap belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the lap belt.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.
169
170
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X224 16X225
2. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling its free end to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Installation with 3−point type seat belt
(A) Infant seat installation
16X226a
16X103b
3. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button.
An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.
171
172
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X070c 16x633
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the second right seat.
Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front seat backs.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X106a 16X107a
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
173
174
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X108a 16X109a
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
16X207
16X104b
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.
175
176
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. In order to activate the occupant classification system correctly, install the forward
− facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the following order:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the front passenger seat without putting your weight on the front passenger seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
6. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
The occupant classification indicator light should indicate
“OFF” when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and the child is in the child restraint system after following these procedures.
The “OFF” indicator indicates the SRS front passenger airbag will not deploy. If the indicator light indicates “ON”, remove the child restraint system and reinstall it with the ignition key in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. If the indicator light still indicates
“ON” when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, then the SRS front passenger airbag may deploy in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in this condition. Remove the child restraint system and contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when unavoidable. If you must install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat, put the seat in its most rearward position, and install the forward−facing child restraint system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger occupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the child restraint system and the front passenger airbag could deploy.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X071b 16X111b
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
Move seat fully back
A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
177
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x634 16X112a
178
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the second right seat.
Child restraint systems installed on the third seat should not contact the second seat backs.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X113a 16X114a
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
179
180
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16X115a 16X116a
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat installation
16X117a
16X105b
A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position only.
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the front passenger occupant classification indicator light indicates
“OFF”, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
181
182
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
16X118d
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 121 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on child’s hip as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child’s arm.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.
16X119a
2. To remove the booster seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.
183
184
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Using a top strap
Symbol
16x262c
16x261
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.
Anchor brackets
Use an anchor bracket located behind the second seat on the floor to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each second seating position.
The symbol shown in the illustration indicates the locations of anchor brackets.
16x263
1. Remove the head restraint.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x264a
2. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
3. Take off the carpet, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Types
of child restraint system” on page 164.
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
185
186
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x265
4. Replace the head restraint.
Installation with child restraint lower anchorages
16x266
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2
specification are installed in the second seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of left and center second seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS213 or
CMVSS213 specification can be fixed with these anchorages.
In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
16X625c
16x659a
Most upright position
1. Fold down the seatback and back to the most upright position until it locks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.
2. Take off the cover between the seat cushion and seatback and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the symbol in the seatback.
187
188
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16x649a
Canada only
Type A:
3. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.
16x650a
Canada only
Type B:
3. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
After securing the child restraint system, never recline the seat.
Do not install a child restraint system on the third seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the second seat. Otherwise, the child or second seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording the driving position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and the selector lever is in the “P” position.
Setting the driving position
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
16X162
16X163
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and outside rear view mirrors to the desired position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1” or “2” until the signal beeps.
When you push button “1” or “2”, the driving position will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button.
189
190
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Conditions for memorized position activation
Ignition key “ON” and selector lever in “P” position.
All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.
Key not in ignition switch and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s door.
The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt and telescopic steering.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”) again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory switch.
SECTION
1
–
7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel and mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering column
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
192
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING
COLUMN
Adjustment of steering column tilt
Adjustment of telescopic steering column
16X099g
16X098g
To adjust the tilt of the steering column, push the control switch upward or downward to set it to the desired position.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
To adjust the steering column length, push the control switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to the desired position.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
Automatic tilt−away*
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
16X100f 16X013a
When the ignition key is removed, the steering column moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for easy exit and entry.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch, the steering column returns to the previously set position.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal flat mirror.
When the inside rear view mirror darkens in “AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see
“Inside rear view mirror” on page 196.
When you push the outside rear view mirror defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Outside rear view mirror
193
194
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur, resulting in death or serious injuries.
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the outside rear view mirror defogger switch is on.
Power rear view mirror control
16X014f
1 Control switch 2 Master switch
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control switch on the desired side.
The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
When you are backing up, you can adjust the mirrors down quickly by the following operations with the ignition on.
Put the selector lever in the “R” position.
Place the master switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right).
The mirrors return to the previous position by any of the following operations.
Put the selector lever in a position other than “R”.
Place the master switch in the neutral position.
Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free the mirror.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Folding rear view mirrors
16X015f
To fold the rear view mirrors, push the switch. To return to their original position, push the switch again.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury and any mirror malfunction, do not touch the mirror while it is moving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
195
196
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
16X016e
When the inside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the switch changes the mode between “AUTO” and “DAY”.
The indicator comes on when the “AUTO” mode is selected.
“DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal.
“AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the “AUTO” mode.
16x658b
To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
Compass (vehicles without navigation system)
16x271a
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. The illustration shown above indicates that the vehicle is heading north.
Displays
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
Directions
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer than 3 seconds turns on or off the compass display.
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
Any door is open.
If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle in motion.
For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below.
197
198
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the button for longer than about 6 seconds until the number (1
−
15) appears on the display. Then push the button again, referring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is.
16x657
Zone number
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is finished.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)
16x270
16x280a
“C” appears on the display in case the circling calibration is required due to a drastic change in the magnetic field. To rectify this, follow the calibration procedure below.
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is complete with the direction shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because of the magnetized vehicle, etc., take your vehicle to Lexus dealer.
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
199
200
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
SECTION
2
–
1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear air conditioning controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System, please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
201
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
20X017e
202
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See
“Instrument panel light control” on page 66 for details.
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature.
This air conditioning features automatic fan speed and air flow control which automatically selects the most suitable fan speed and air flow to control the temperature. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
1 Temperature control knob
2 Automatic control button
3 Temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or
Centigrade)
4 Fan speed display
5 Air flow display
6 Air conditioning on−off button
7 Air flow control button
8 Windshield air flow button
9 Fan speed control button
10
11
Air intake control button
OFF button
AIR CONDITIONING
203
AIR CONDITIONING
20X018e
204
Air flow selection
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION − automatic control
20X020d
20X019d
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on
− off of the air conditioning, and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
Push the “OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the “TEMP” knob until the desired temperature is displayed.
The “TEMP” knob is used to set the desired passenger compartment temperature. The temperature of air delivered to the passenger compartment will be controlled automatically according to the setting. The figures on the panel indicate degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
205
206
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION − manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired −
4 Floor/Windshield
−
Air flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents.
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
If quick heating or cooling is desired −
Turn the “TEMP” knob until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX. COLD” appears on the display.
If manual fan speed control is desired −
20X021a
21x600
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by pressing the button. The function of each mode is as follows:
1 Panel
−
Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2 Bi−level
−
Air flows from both the floor vents and the instrument panel vents.
3 Floor
−
Air flows mainly from the floor vents.
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
1 Fan speed at low 2 Fan speed at high
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF” button turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting.
If manual switching of air intake is desired −
20X023a
Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to
AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which mode is now selected.
1 RECIRCULATED mode − If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, select this mode.
2 EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode − If the outside air contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates rapidly), the system changes automatically from the
OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to the RECIRCULATED mode (with indicators 1 and 2 on).
3 OUTSIDE AIR mode − The system will take fresh outside air into the vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING
Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO” mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate.
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
In the following cases, the RECIRCULATED mode may change to the OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically to prevent interior fog.
When the outside temperature becomes lower than 4 C
(39 F).
When the air conditioning compressor malfunctions.
When the air conditioning cooler refrigerant decreases.
To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between the RECIRCULATED and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC mode, push the air intake control button until the “AUTO” indicator light flashes. The display changes as illustrated below.
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the vehicle has stopped.
207
208
AIR CONDITIONING
20X062d
When you turn the “TEMP” knob, the sensitivity changes from
“+3” down to “
−
3”. If you do not operate any button for a few seconds or if you push a button other than the air intake control button and temperature control knob, the previous display returns.
If manual on−off of the air conditioning is desired −
Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will be cancelled.
If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0 C
(32 F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this time, the indicator on the A/C button is off and the EXHAUST
GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes.
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year
− round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation.
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
“A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus dealer.
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
20X024b
To remove interior fog on the windshield −
Push the windshield air flow button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield −
1. Place the temperature control lever at the maximum temperature.
2. Push the windshield air flow button.
3. Push the “HI” button of the fan speed control button to obtain a maximum air flow.
4. Leave the air conditioning on
− off button off.
For further information for removing frost and fog, see “Lower
When the windshield air flow button is pushed while operating, the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.
AIR CONDITIONING
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used.
CAUTION
Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
209
210
AIR CONDITIONING
(c) Rear air conditioning switch (d) Air conditioning filter
20X501 21x587
To turn on the rear air conditioning when you sit on the front seat, push this switch. The rear air conditioning operates in the automatic mode. To adjust the air flow and setting temperature, follow the steps in accordance with
“Rear air conditioning controls” on page 213.
The air conditioning filter information label is placed on the left side of the glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the vehicle through the air conditioning vent.
20X073c
Your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning filter.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use and reduce the air flow quantity.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or desert areas, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.)
AIR CONDITIONING
(e) Operating tips
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard vents. (See “Center vents”, “Side vents” and “Lower vent”.)
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the
“OFF” button.
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.
211
AIR CONDITIONING
Center vents Lower vent
20X039d 20X026a
The center vents may be opened or closed as shown.
Side vents
The lower vent may be opened or closed as shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the lower vent when you push the windshield air flow button or use the “Floor” or the “Floor/Windshield” mode.
20X025c
212
The side vents may be opened or closed as shown.
REAR AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROLS
20X054b
AIR CONDITIONING
1 Automatic control button
2 Air flow control buttons
3 OFF button
4 Temperature control lever
5 Fan speed control buttons
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature.
This air conditioning features automatic fan speed and air flow control which automatically selects the most suitable fan speed and air flow to control the temperature. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
The control panel is located in the roof panel above the second seat.
213
AIR CONDITIONING
21x611
SETTING OPERATION − automatic control
20X055a
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
Air flow quantity and switching of the diffusers are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the operation corresponding to the button depressed is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.
Push the “OFF” button to turn the rear air conditioning off.
214
Warm air
Cool air
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION − manual control
If manual air flow selection is desired −
20X056
20X057a
2. Use the temperature control lever to set the desired temperature.
Slide the lever to the right for higher temperature and to the left for lower temperature.
In the vehicles sold in U.S.A., the figures above the temperature control lever are the temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit, while in the vehicles sold in Canada, the temperature is indicated in degrees Centigrade.
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by pressing in the appropriate air flow control button.
The function of each button is as follows:
1 Panel
−
Air flows mainly from the roof panel vents.
2 Bi−level
−
Air flows from both the floor vents and the roof panel vents.
3 Floor
−
Air flows mainly from the floor vents.
Air at higher than room temperature does not flow from the roof panel vents.
Air at lower than room temperature does not flow from the floor vents.
215
216
AIR CONDITIONING
If manual fan speed control is desired −
20X058a
1 Low speed 2 Middle speed
3 High speed
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the appropriate fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF” button turns off the fan.
SECTION
2
–
2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System, please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
217
AUDIO
Quick reference for your audio system
AUDIO SYSTEM
22X611a
218
1 Stopping and ejecting a CD
2 CD slot
3 Display of functions in TAPE mode
RPT:
Automatic repeat
:
DOLBY NR
:
Side change
:
Rewinding or Fast forwarding
:
3 Display of functions in CD mode
RAND:
Random access
RPT:
Automatic repeat
:
CD selection
:
Reversing or Fast forwarding
:
4 Scan button
(See page 226, 231 or 240 for details.)
5 Load button
AUDIO
6 TEXT button
(See page 227, 232 or 242 for details.)
7 AUDIO·TUNE knob
for details.)
8 Traffic announcement button
9 Program type button
10 Mode selectors
11 AM·FM mode:
Seek tuning
(See page 224 or 225 for details.)
SAT mode:
Manual tuning
TAPE or CD mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 237 or 241 for details.)
12
Cassette tape slot
13
14
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
15 Function buttons
1 − 6:
Station selector buttons
219
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
(a) Turning the system on and off
21X506b
21X507a
Push “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another.
If the tape or CD is not set, the cassette player or CD player does not turn on.
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again.
220
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
AUDIO
21X553 22X612
In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each function.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid
− range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid
− range, and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.
Each time you push the “AUDIO−TUNE” knob, the display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low
− pitched tones.
MID: Adjusts mid
− pitched tones.
TRE: Adjusts high
− pitched tones.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers.
ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer.
Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL): When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. While the
Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) is on, “ASL” appears on the display.
221
AUDIO
(c) Your power antenna
The antenna automatically extends when the radio is on, and retracts when the radio mode is off. However, even if you turn off the radio when the radio on the rear seat audio system is on, the antenna does not retract.
21X509
NOTICE
Retract the antenna when entering or passing through low structures, such as a garage or an automatic car wash. Failure to do so may damage the antenna.
The antenna mast has to be extended higher than 100 mm (3.94 in.) length when the audio is on. Extend the antenna mast when the radio signal is weak.
Putting a film (especially a conductive or metallic film) on the right−hand rear quarter window may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the film, consult with your Lexus dealer.
222
To adjust the height of the antenna manually, push the switch at either side, this may be performed during antenna extension. The maximum extension length is 850 mm (33.5 in.).
Every time you turn the radio on, the antenna will extend to its previous position.
Clean the antenna mast periodically with a clean dry cloth.
CAUTION
Before extending the antenna, confirm that no one is close enough to get injured.
AUDIO
(d) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the right.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the cassette player. Do not insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
(e) Your CD player with changer
22x647
Your changer can store up to 6 CDs and play selected CDs or continuously play all the CDs set in the player.
When you set CDs into the player, make sure their labels face up. If not, the player will display “ERROR1” and the CD number.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the CD player. Do not insert anything other than CDs into the slot.
Do not insert a CD upon another one, or it will damage the changer. Insert only one CD into the slot at a time.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) CDs only.
223
224
AUDIO
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
21X554
21X511a
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display.
If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio broadcast
system, when you push the “AM·SAT” button, “AM”,
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” station appears on the display. For details about satellite radio broadcast, see “Radio operation
(XM satellite radio broadcast)” on page 228
Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or to the left to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST” disappears from the display.
(b) Presetting a station
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
21X555
21X556b
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1
−
6 ) for the station you want.
The button number ( 1
−
6 ) and station frequency appear on the display.
Manual tuning: Turn the “AUDIO
−
TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down to another frequency.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched automatically one after another.
225
226
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
TYPE (Program type):
21X572
22X613
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
When you push the “TYPE” button, the current program type receiving from RDS station appears on the display.
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
AUDIO
Each time you push the “ ” or “ ” button, the program type changes as in the following:
ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
MISC
ALERT (Emergency message)
Push the “SEEK TRACK” or “SCAN” button with the program type shown on the display and the radio seeks or scans the station in the relevant program type.
TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode.
Radio text message:
21x557
If the radio receives a radio text from RDS station, “MSG” appears on the display. Push the “TEXT” button, and a text message is displayed.
If the entire the message is not displayed, “ ” will appear on the display. To display the rest of the message, push and hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.
After the entire message has been displayed, the message will disappear.
In case a text message is not accepted on the display, you can push the “TEXT” button and hold it to display the rest of the message.
When the system can show the station name, “RDS” appears on the display. Each time you push the “TEXT” button, indication on the display changes from the band to the station name, a radio text in this order. After 6 seconds passes, indication returns to the band.
227
228
AUDIO
Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your vehicle, an additional genuine Lexus satellite receiver and antenna (or equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A subscription to the XM satellite radio service is also necessary.
(a) How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states.
How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service agreement with the XM radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio, visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s
Listener Care at (800) 852
−
9696. The XM radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM radio customer service agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For details, see “Displaying the radio ID” below.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM satellite radio and are subject to change.
Satellite tuner technology notice:
Lexus satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval
Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by the XM satellite radio.
(b) Displaying the radio ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or when reporting a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the “AUDIO
−
TUNE” knob, the
ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID and the specific radio ID code.
AUDIO
(c) Listening to the satellite radio
22x651
21x511a
Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose a SAT station.
Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on the display.
Turn this knob to select the next or previous channel.
229
230
AUDIO
(d) Presetting a channel (e) Selecting a channel
Tune in the desired channel using one of the following methods.
22x652
22x653a
1. Tune in the desired channel.
2. Push one of the channel selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the channel to the button and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store three SAT channels. To change the preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure.
The preset channel memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1
−
6 ) for the channel you want. The button number ( 1
−
6 ) and channel number appear on the display.
Manual tuning within the channel category: Turn the
“AUDIO
−
TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down the channel.
Manual tuning within the current channel category: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will step up or down the channel within the current channel category.
AUDIO
(f) Channel category
21X572
22x654
To scan the currently selected channel category : Push the
“SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again.
To select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
To scan the preset channels: Push the “SCAN” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the display.
The radio will tune in the next preset channel , stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset channel. To select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
When you push the TYPE button, the current channel category appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push either “ ” or “ ” button to switch to the next or previous category.
231
232
AUDIO
(g) Displaying the title and name
22x655
When you push the “TEXT” button, the display changes as follows:
CH NAME ⇒ TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ⇒ NAME
(ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ⇒ CH NUMBER ⇒ CH NAME
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.)
AUDIO
(h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.
A short
− circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free
− to
− air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
−−−−−
−−−
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time.
No action needed.
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 852
−
9696 during the following hours:
Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m – 12 a.m.
233
234
AUDIO
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Information to user
Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and
Talk) of only XM satellite radio and “Text Information”* linked to the respective audio services.
*Text Information includes, Channel Name, (Artist)
Name, (Song) Title and Category Name.
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
20X559
21X558b
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button.
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the
button. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise reduction system is on.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button until the symbol disappears from the display.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double − D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
235
236
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection (c) Automatic program selection
21X560 21X561
“Program” button: Push the “ ” button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected ( indicates top side, indicates bottom side).
“Rewind” button: Push the “
“REW” appears on the display.
” button to rewind a tape.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “ ” button to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 5 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
21X562a
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to nine programs at a time.
Push this button on the right side to skip forward. “FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.
AUDIO
Push this button on the left side to skip backward. Push the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display.
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 5 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly.
“RPT” or “Automatic program selection” features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings.
237
238
AUDIO
CD player operation
(a) Inserting or ejecting CDs
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Your changer can store up to 6 CDs.
22x648
Setting a single CD alone:
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
The umber indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the umber blinking indicators changes to green, and the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD”, the CD door opens.
2. Insert only one CD while the CD door is open.
You can set a CD at the lowest empty CD number.
After insertion, the set CD is automatically loaded.
If the label faces down, the CD cannot be played. In this case,
“ERROR1” and CD number appear on the display.
If you need to insert the next CD, repeat the same procedure to insert another CD.
Setting all the CDs:
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
The umber indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the umber blinking indicators changes to green, and the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD”, the CD door opens.
2. Insert only one CD while the CD door is open.
The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
3. Insert the next CD after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the CD door opens.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the CDs.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
If you do not insert the CDs within 15 seconds after pushing the
“LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be canceled automatically.
NOTICE
Do not insert one CD stacked on top of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent CDs from getting stuck in the player.
AUDIO
(b) Playing a CD
21X563
22X614
Ejecting a single CD alone:
1. Push the button under the “ ” or “ ” signal on the display to display the CD number you want to eject.
2. Push the “EJECT” button briefly.
At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at both ends of the slot as well as CD number light up.
Ejecting all the CDs:
Push the “EJECT” button until you hear a beep.
However, if you accidentally pushed the “EJECT” button, push the “DISC” or “LOAD” button to insert the CD again.
Do not push in the CD which is being ejected forcibly.
Push the “DISC” button if the CDs are already loaded in the player.
“CD” appears on the display.
The CDs set in the player are played continuously, starting with the last CD you inserted. The CD number of the CD currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display.
When play of one CD ends, the first track of the following CD starts. When play of the final CD ends, play of the first CD starts again.
The player will skip any empty CD number.
239
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a desired CD (d) Searching for a desired track or CD
21X565 21X566
240
Push the “ ” or “ ”button to select the CD number.
Push the button several times until the desired CD number appears on the display. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected CD from the first track.
Searching for a desired track:
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “ ” will appear on the display. The CD player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN” button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the CD, it will continue scanning at track 1.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.
Searching for a desired CD:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “ ” on the display, the program at the beginning of each CD will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
After all the CDs in the player are scanned in one pass, the scan function is cancelled.
AUDIO
(e) Selecting a desired track (f) Repeating a track or a CD
21X567a 21X568
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning.
“Fast forward” button.
Push the “ ” button and hold it to fast forward the CD. When you release the button, the CD player will resume playing from that position.
“Reverse” button.
Push the “ ” button and hold it to reverse the CD. When you release the button, the CD player will resume playing.
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either replay a CD track or a whole CD.
Repeating a track: Push the “ ” button briefly while the track is playing. “ ” will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a CD: Push the “ ” button until you hear a beep.
“ ” will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the CD you are listening to. When the CD ends, the player will automatically go back to the first track on the CD and replay. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
241
AUDIO
(g) Random playing (h) CD text
21X569 21x586
242
“RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can either listen to the tracks on all the CDs in the player in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific CD in random order.
Random playing for the tracks on a CD: Push the “ button briefly. “ ” will appear on the display and play the CD you are listening to in random order.
”
Random playing for all the tacks in the magazine: Push the
“ ” button until you hear a beep. “ ” will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the CDs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “ ” a second time.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the button to reset.
When you push the “TEXT” button while the CD with CD text display function (the logo “CD TEXT” marked on the
CD) is being played, the track number, elapsed time, CD title and then track title appear on the display.
When you push this button if the CD does not have a text display function, “NO TITLE” appears on the display.
The display can show up to 12 letters at once. If the CD title or music title is longer than 12 letters, hold down the button for longer than 1 second. The letters after the 12th one are shown.
However, 24 letters at maximum can be shown on the display.
When you push this button for longer than 1 second or play no operation for about 6 seconds with the letters after the 13th one on the display, the display returns and shows the first 12 letters.
Even if the CD title or music title is longer than 24 letters, the display can show up to 24 letters.
(i) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, your audio system will display the following error messages.
If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the CD from the player and allow the player to cool down.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the
CD is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the CD or insert it correctly.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It indicates there is trouble inside the system. Eject the CD.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
21x570
AUDIO
Audio remote controls (steering switches)
The switches are installed on the left side of the steering wheel.
“MODE” switch: Use this switch to change the mode. If a tape or CD is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD” mode is skipped.
When you push the switch with the audio system turned off, the audio system turns on.
“ ” switches: Use these switches to adjust the volume.
Push “+” to increase the volume and “–” to decrease the volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while the switch is being pressed.
243
244
AUDIO
(a) When the radio mode is selected
“ ” or “ ” select a station.
switch: Push this switch for seek tuning or to
To select a preset station, push the switch briefly. Do this again to select the next preset station.
To seek a station, push and hold the switch until you hear a beep. Do this again to find the next station. If you push the switch on either side of the “ ” seek mode, seeking will be cancelled.
or “ ” during the
To step up or down the frequency, push and hold the switch even after you hear a beep. When you release from the switch, the radio will begin seeking up or down for a station.
Do this again to find the next station.
XM satellite radio*—
To select a preset channel, push the “ ” or “ switch. Repeat until a desired channel is found.
” side of the
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner and service. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch to fast forward or rewind the tape or for automatic program selection.
Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push the same side on the switch until you hear a beep.
Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection.
When automatically selecting a program, you can skip up to
9 programs at a time. See page 237 for details.
(c) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is selected
“ ” or “ track or CD.
” switch: Use this switch to select a desired
Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.
To select a desired CD, push and hold this switch until the desired number of the CD appears and you hear a beep.
CAUTION
Operate the switches with due care while you are driving to avoid accidents.
Rear seat audio system
In the rear seat, you can enjoy a different mode from the one used on the front audio system, using headphones.
21x571a
(a) Turning the system on and off
“ON/SOURCE” button: Use this button to turn the system on when the system is off. When the system is turned on, the mode changes by pushing this button.
“OFF” button: Use this button to turn off the system.
“Volume adjusting” knob: Use this knob to adjust the volume.
AUDIO
(b) When the radio mode is selected
“ CH ” button: Push this button to select a station preset on the preset button of the front audio system. Each push of the button changes to the station with higher numbered preset button.
“ TUNE ” button: Push this button for manual tuning or seek tuning.
Push this button briefly. Each time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to another frequency.
Push this button and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station, and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched out one after another.
(c) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
“ PROG ” button: Push this button to select the other side of a cassette tape.
“ TRACK ” button: Push the left or right side to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. For
details, see “Automatic program selection” on page 236.
245
246
AUDIO
(d) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is selected
“ DISC ” Use this button to search a desired CD.
“ TRACK ” button: Use this button to search a desired track or push this button and hold it to fast forward or reverse.
(e) Some basics
This system cannot be used if the audio system is not turned on.
You cannot select “AM” or “FM” mode in the rear seat if the
“FM” or “AM” mode is used on the front seats side.
If you select the same mode as the front seats side, operating the controller will affect the mode on the front seats side.
Vehicles with navigation system only:
When the XM satellite radio* is selected in the front seat, the
“CD” or “DVD” mode cannot be selected in the rear seat.
When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is selected in the rear seat, selecting the XM satellite radio* in the front seat will automatically change the “CD” or “DVD” to “AM” mode in the rear seat.
CAUTION
This system is not designed for a driver. So, the driver should not use this system while driving.
Audio system operating hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or CDs into the cassette tape slot or CD slot.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio
−
it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations
−
Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path
−
FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.
AUDIO
Static and fluttering
−
These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping
−
If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading
−
AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere
−
especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference
−
When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static
−
AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.
247
248
AUDIO
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.)
Use high
− quality cassettes:
Low
− quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto
− reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
Caring for your CD player and CDs
Your CD player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) CDs only.
Extremely high temperature can keep your CD player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a CD.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your CD player skip.
If moisture gets into your CD player, you may not hear any sound even though your CD player appears to be working.
Remove the CD from the player and wait until it dries.
CAUTION
CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
20L037 22sv01
Use only CDs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your CD player.
Copy
− protected CD
CD
−
R (CD
−
Recordable)
CD
−
RW (CD
−
Re
− writable)
CD
−
ROM
Special shaped CDs
21z017
Transparent/translucent CDs
AUDIO
249
250
AUDIO
Low quality CDs
22sv02
22sv03
Labeled CDs
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled CDs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such CDs may damage the player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the
CD.
AUDIO
20L038 20L039
Correct Wrong
Handle CDs carefully, especially when you set them into the magazine. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them.
Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other CD damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the CD up to the light.)
To clean a CD: Wipe it with a soft, lint
− free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the CD (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti
− static device.
251
252
AUDIO
SECTION
3
–
1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active height control suspension (AHC)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive variable suspension (AVS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable gear ratio steering system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
254
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE−WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
31X001f
Three−way catalytic converters are emission control devices installed in the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or rags.
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three−way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
Avoid racing the engine.
Do not push−start or pull−start your vehicle.
Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electric ignition system or fuel system could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic converter temperature.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check−up as soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle and its three−way catalytic converter system best.
To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Keep the back door closed while driving. An open or unsealed back door may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, open the windows and close the back door to ensure plenty of fresh air enters the vehicle. If you can smell exhaust fumes even though there are no other vehicles in the surrounding area, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes can lead to death by gas poisoning.
255
256
STARTING AND DRIVING
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators function when turning the key to “ON”, and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
IGNITION SWITCH
31X002a
“START” − Starter motor on. The key will return to the
“ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 258.
“ON” − Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the electronic ignition system could be damaged.
“ACC” − Accessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.
STARTING AND DRIVING
It is not a malfunction if the needles on all meters and gauges move slightly when the key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or
“START” position.
Several hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear a sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not
indicate a malfunction. (See page vii.)
31X003a
“LOCK” − Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
To turn the key from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position, you must put the transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. See “Engine immobilizer system” on page
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
“LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to “ACC”.
257
258
STARTING AND DRIVING
PARKING BRAKE
31X065
1 To set: Pull up the lever. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake.
2 To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1), press the lock release button (2), and lower the lever (3).
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
Cranking hold function
Once you turn the ignition key to “START” position and release it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in
“ON” position until it starts.
The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you hold the key in “START” position, the function will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.
Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
“Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air
− fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to
“START” position, then release it.
Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For warming up drive with smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls ...
Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 334.
NOTICE
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of “P” position when the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in “ON” position ( )
31x542
259
260
STARTING AND DRIVING
The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in the following parts.
(a) Normal driving
(b) Using engine braking
(c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
(d) Backing up
(e) Parking
(f) Good driving practice
(g) Driving in “2nd STRT” (second start) mode
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Normal driving
31X007g
31X006f
1 “P” (Park) position 2 “N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the
The transmission must be in “P” or “N”. The engine will not start in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to
“START”.
1 Driving pattern selector switch
2 Normal position 3 Power position
2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the “Normal” position.
Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which allows you to select either “Normal” or “Power” to suit your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the “Normal” position to improve fuel economy.
3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use the “Power” position.
In the “Power” position, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the
“Normal” position.
261
262
STARTING AND DRIVING
31X008e
1 Brake pedal 2 “D” (Drive) position
4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the “D” position. (See “(b) Using engine braking” and “(f)
Good driving practice” for exceptions.)
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines, declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the suitable driving power and engine braking.
When the lever is in the “4” position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides more acceleration by automatically downshifting the transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(b) Using engine braking”.
(b) Using engine braking
31X009f
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the transmission in the way described below:
1 Shift into the “4” position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. If
you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 278.
2 Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and stronger engine braking will be enabled.
Transfer “H”
“L”
129 km/h
51 km/h
(80 mph)
(32 mph)
STARTING AND DRIVING
3 Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and more powerful engine braking than that of “3” position will be enabled.
Transfer
4 Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and maximum engine braking will be enabled.
Transfer
“H”
“L”
“H”
“L”
88 km/h
35 km/h
37 km/h
14 km/h
(55 mph)
(22 mph)
(23 mph)
(9 mph)
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.
263
264
STARTING AND DRIVING
(c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear.
NOTICE
Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:
Transmission
“4”
“3”
Transfer
“L” “H”
72 km/h (45 mph) 178 km/h (111 mph)
52 km/h (32 mph) 127 km/h (79 mph)
“2”
“L”
36 km/h (22 mph)
20 km/h (12 mph)
87 km/h (54 mph)
51 km/h (32 mph)
Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the “3”, “2” or “L” position. This may cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, “4” position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.
(d) Backing up
31X010e
1 Brake pedal 2 “R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
When you are backing up, you can adjust the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side down quickly. For details, see
(e) Parking
31X011d
1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake lever
3 “P” (Park) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake fully.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
While the vehicle is moving, never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under any circumstances.
Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Good driving practice
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between the fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope.
When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.
265
STARTING AND DRIVING
(g) Driving in “2nd STRT” (second start) mode
FOUR−WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
(a) Four−wheel drive control
31X012c
31X013e
266
In the “2nd STRT” (second start) mode, the transmission system shifts up from second gear. Use this mode when starting your vehicle in sand, mud, ice or snow.
To set the “2nd STRT” mode, push the “2nd” switch. In the “2nd
STRT” mode, the “2nd STRT” indicator light comes on. To cancel the “2nd STRT” mode, push the “2nd” switch again.
The “PWR” mode is automatically cancelled when you push the “2nd” switch.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever
If you cannot shift the selector lever from “P” position even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see “If you cannot shift
automatic transmission selector lever” on page 357.
Use the four−wheel drive control lever and center differential lock button to select the following transfer and center differential modes.
The “H” and “L” position of the four
− wheel drive control lever provides either lock or unlock mode of the center differential depending on the center differential lock button position.
Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle stability control system is automatically turned off and the center differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator lights come on because the function that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on. After the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy surface, turn the center differential lock switch off.
Make sure the center differential lock indicator light and vehicle stability control system off indicator light turn off.
“H” (high speed position, center differential unlocked):
Lever at “H”, center differential lock button left out
Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry hard
− surfaced roads to wet, icy or snow
− covered roads. This position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and better vehicle control.
“H” (high speed position, center differential locked):
Lever at “H”, center differential lock button pushed in
Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock mode.
“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N”
No power is delivered to the wheels. The vehicle must be stopped.
STARTING AND DRIVING
“L” (low speed position, center differential unlocked):
Lever at “L”, center differential lock button left out
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing or descending steep hills, off
− road driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.
In this mode, the braking feeling that occurs when the wheels are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the “L”
(low position, center differential locked) mode.
“L” (low speed position, center differential locked): Lever at “L”, center differential lock button pushed in
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L”
(low speed position, center differential unlocked) mode. Also, using this mode when driving down steep off
− road inclines will help contribute to increased vehicle stability.
The indicator light tells when the differential lock is engaged.
Note that the differential is not still locked as long as the indicator light remains off.
When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
The center differential lock system operation is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel the cruise control system. To cancel the cruise control system,
see “Cruise control” on page 275.
267
268
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the center differential lock button, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further instructions.
Advice for driving on slippery roads in “L” (low speed position) mode
If you shift the four
− wheel drive control lever to “L”, the automatic transmission lever to “2” when you drive in steep off
− road areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the active traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.
Use the “L” position of the automatic transmission lever for maximum power and traction when your wheels get stuck or when you drive down a steep incline. In the following cases, the out put of the brake can be controlled by the active traction control system if the engine speed is under 3,000 rpm
(normally engine speed is under 3,000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).
The four
− wheel drive control lever in the “L” position and the automatic transmission lever in the “L” position or the automatic transmission lever in the “D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmission downshifting to the first gear
The four
− wheel drive control lever in the “L” position and the automatic transmission lever in the “R” position
(As for the automatic transmission lever positions, see
“Automatic transmission” on page 259.)
(b) Shifting procedure
To shift between unlock and lock modes in “H”, push the center differential lock button.
To shift between unlock and lock modes in “L”, push the center differential lock button.
To shift between “H” and “L”, stop the vehicle, put the transmission into “N” and move the four
− wheel drive control lever.
CAUTION
Never move the four−wheel drive control lever if wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
NOTICE
For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential. To prevent damage to the center differential lock system, do not push the center differential lock button when the vehicle is cornering or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground. If the indicator light does not go off when unlocking the center differential, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the rear of the vehicle while backing up. The displayed image on the screen is a horizontally reversed mirror image of the inside rear view mirror.
To display the rear view image on the screen, place the selector lever in the “R” position when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
If you move the selector lever out of the “R” position, the screen returns to the previous screen. Operating another function of the navigation system will display another screen.
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually.
CAUTION
Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear.
Use caution just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen is different from actual conditions. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If you back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
Do not use the system when the back door is not completely closed.
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure to have the camera’s position and mounting angle checked at your Lexus dealer.
If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth.
If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.
Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted or not entirely visible when outside temperature is low.
When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before proceeding.
269
STARTING AND DRIVING
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately level on screen.
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
31x601a
270
Check surroundings for safety.
Corners of bumper
STARTING AND DRIVING
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
31x602b
The rear view monitor system camera is located on the back door as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning.
In the dark (for example, at night)
When the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low
When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when humidity is high (for example, when it rains)
When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) adheres to the camera lens
When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens
31x603
Check surroundings for safety.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect* peculiar to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.
271
STARTING AND DRIVING
LEXUS NIGHT VIEW SYSTEM
Turning on the system
31X521 31x522b
272
The Lexus night view system can help you see forward when driving at night. If pedestrians or objects are detected within the area reaching the tip of the low beam to high beam, they are displayed along with the layout of the road in the windshield as a monochrome image.
CAUTION
This system should be used as a supplemental aid to help you see objects. Never depend on this system only. Be sure to view objects with your own eyes while driving.
This system is designed to help you see objects better when driving in a flat area with few curves in darkness. Use of this function in an area with many curves or slopes or in a well−lit area could cause an accident.
The Lexus night view system turns on and the “MAIN” indicator light comes on when you push the knob with the ignition switch on:
When the system is turned on in the following conditions, the head
− up display (night view display) shutter opens automatically and the image sent from the head
− up display is shown on the windshield.
It is dark outside.
The headlights are on.
When the vehicle starts moving in this condition, the “BEAM” indicator light comes on, the near
− infrared floodlight (night view projector) is irradiated, and the image of the road ahead is shown on the windshield.
You can adjust the brightness by turning the knob.
STARTING AND DRIVING
While the system is on, pushing the knob turns off the “MAIN” indicator light and the system. If you turn the ignition off with the system turned on, the system will be turned off automatically.
CAUTION
If the image in the head−up display (night view display) is too bright, you cannot see the surroundings through the windshield clearly. To avoid glare, do not make the display brighter than necessary.
31x533c
1 Near−infrared floodlight (Night view projector)
2 Near−infrared camera (Night view camera)
3 Head−up display (Night view display)
4 Automatic light control sensor
The near−infrared floodlight (night view projector which irradiates near−infrared light not seen by people) located near the fog lights irradiates the area reaching from the tip of the low beam to high beam. The near−infrared camera
(night view camera) located on top of the windshield converts irradiated light into an image. This image is shown on the head−up display (night view display) located on the bottom of the windshield.
The automatic light control sensor is on top of the passenger side instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel and do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
273
274
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following conditions, the image may not be clear or the view of the road ahead may not be shown at all.
Driving on hills with many up and down slopes
Driving on road with curves
In severe weather conditions such as rain, fog or snow
Strong near
− infrared light emission, such as the light coming from a vehicle running in the opposite lane, enters the near
− infrared camera (night view camera).
An object or clothing of a pedestrian is made of a certain kind of material (ex. leather).
The windshield or the lens of the near
− infrared floodlight
(night view projector) is dirty. (Always keep the windshield and the lens clean.)
Double vision of image reduces clarity in some situation.
The top of the windshield fogs up.
If the top of the windshield fogs up, the glass in front of the lens of the camera will also fog up, resulting in deterioration of the system performance. Defog the windshield by pushing the windshield air flow button on the air conditioning.
If you notice the inner lens of the near
− infrared camera (night view camera) is dirty, have it inspected at your Lexus dealer.
You cannot use this system to read a road sign or signboard.
If the outside temperature is low, the display may darken or it may take time to display the image with the system on.
The near
− infrared floodlight (night view projector) is installed on the bumper. If the bumper is deformed in a collision, etc., the performance of the system will be affected. Have it repaired or replaced at Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
The near−infrared floodlight (night view projector) irradiates strong energy not visible to the eyes. Do not stare at the floodlight at close range for a long time.
Your eyes could be seriously injured.
NOTICE
Do not put anything in front of the head−up display
(night view display) shutter. It may hinder the opening or closing of the shutter, resulting in a malfunction of the system.
Do not let drinks spill on the head−up display. This may cause a malfunction of the system.
If an object gets caught in the shutter and it does not close securely, it may cause a malfunction of the system. Open the shutter with your hand and remove the object. The shutter will function properly after you turn the ignition off and then on.
31x501a
If this warning light comes on, the bulb of the near−infrared floodlight (night view projector) has blown out. Have the bulb replaced at your Lexus dealer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruising speed can be set to any speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
Within the limits of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up or down grades. However, changes in vehicle speed may occur on steeper grades.
When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal position, regardless of the position of the driving pattern selector switch.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down.
275
STARTING AND DRIVING
Turning the system on and off Setting operation
31X604 31X605
276
To turn the cruise control on, press the “ON–OFF” button. The
“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on to indicate that the cruise control is operational. Pressing the
“ON–OFF” button again turns the system off.
When the system is turned off, cruising speed must be reset when the cruise control is turned on again.
When the ignition key is turned off, the “ON–OFF” switch is also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push the “ON–OFF” switch again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the cruise control, turn the system off when it is not in use. Make sure the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.
Each function is described below.
1 Setting the cruise speed.
The transmission must be in “D” or “4” before you set the cruising speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration
−
for example, when passing
−
depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration.
2 Cancelling the cruise control
The cruise control may be temporarily cancelled by the driver or by the system itself under certain circumstances.
Temporary cancellation allows the set cruising speed to remain in memory.
The cruise control can be temporarily cancelled by doing the following:
Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” direction and releasing it
Depressing the brake pedal
Under certain circumstances, the cruise control is temporarily cancelled:
When vehicle speed falls below 40 km/h (25 mph)
When vehicle stability control is activated
When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set speed, the cruise control is cancelled and the set speed is erased from memory.
The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on to indicate that the system is still in operation.
To turn the cruise control off, push the “ON
−
OFF” button. Make sure the “CRUISE” indicator light is off.
If the cruise control automatically cancels out other than for the above cases, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3 Resuming the cruise control
If the cruise control is temporarily cancelled, the cruising speed can be resumed by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” direction.
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25 mph).
4 Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction.
277
278
STARTING AND DRIVING
5 Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction.
Even if you turn off the overdrive switch with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
Cruise control failure warning
If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes when using the cruise control, press the “ON
−
OFF” button to turn the system off and then press it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system.
The indicator light does not come on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your
Lexus inspected.
ACTIVE HEIGHT CONTROL
SUSPENSION (AHC)
This active height control suspension controls the vehicle height depending on the vehicle driving condition. Select your desired height among the “HI” (high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low) modes with the height select switch.
31X600
(a) Vehicle height modes
“HI” (high) mode
The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.) higher at front and about 50 mm (2.0 in.) higher at rear than the normal mode height.
This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads and through water.
This mode is available when the vehicle speed is under about
30 km/h (19 mph).
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
The “HI” (high) or “Extra high” mode should be used for severe off−road driving condition only. Because the vehicle’s center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in an accident.
When the four
− wheel drive control lever is put at “L”, this mode may change to the extra high mode automatically in accordance with the driving condition.
When the vehicle exceeds the specified vehicle speed, the vehicle height changes to the following:
With the four−wheel drive control lever at “H” and at the
vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or over, the normal mode is automatically selected.
With the four−wheel drive control lever at “L” and at the
vehicle speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) or over, the vehicle height becomes automatically about 25 mm (1.0 in.) higher than the normal mode height. If the vehicle speed is lowered about 20 km/h (12 mph) or less after that, the high mode automatically resumes.
Extra high mode
This mode is automatically selected from the high mode with the four−wheel drive control lever placed in “L” position depending on the vehicle driving condition.
If the vehicle becomes stuck, the vehicle height rises automatically to the extra high mode (slightly higher or at about
70 mm (2.8 in.) higher than normal mode height).
279
280
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the extra high mode changes to the high mode automatically:
When your vehicle is no longer stuck.
When the four
− wheel drive control lever is put in a position other than “L”.
When you push the height select switch on the “ ” side in the extra high mode, the normal mode is selected.
Since the extra high mode is automatically selected, you cannot select this mode on purpose with the height select switch.
“N” (normal) mode
The vehicle height in this mode is standard.
This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
“LO” (low) mode
The vehicle height is about 50 mm (2.0 in.) lower at front and about 40 mm (1.6 in.) lower at rear than the normal mode height.
This mode allows you easy access to the vehicle (getting in and out) and easy loading and unloading operation.
This mode is available when the vehicle is stopped. When you start the vehicle, the normal mode is automatically selected.
NOTICE
The normal mode is automatically selected when the vehicle begins to move in the low mode. So be careful when you drive in any place where the overhead height is limited.
(b) Automatic leveling function
Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage loading condition, the vehicle height is always automatically adjusted to a fixed height in any mode.
However, the vehicle height cannot be raised if the vehicle load
exceeds the limits. (See page 281.)
(c) Vehicle height mode changing condition
To change the vehicle height, it is necessary to meet the following 3 conditions.
The engine should be running.
All the side doors and back door should be closed.
The height control “OFF” indicator light should go off.
When selecting a mode with the four
− wheel drive control lever at “H”, there is a vehicle speed limit. Refer to the following table.
Yes= The mode can be selected.
No = The mode cannot be selected.
Low mode
Normal mode
At vehicle stoppage
Under about 30 km/h (19 mph)
About 30 km/h
(19 mph) or over
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
High mode
Yes
Yes
No
In the following cases the active height control suspension does not operate even if the above conditions are all met.
The brake pedal has been depressed for longer than about
5 seconds with the vehicle stopped.
The suspension fluid temperature is lower than
−
30 C
(
−
22 F). If the engine is warmed up, the suspension fluid temperature will be raised as the inside of the engine compartment becomes warmer. Then the active height control suspension becomes operable.
Driving on bumpy roads, which may cause the suspension to fully elongate.
The steering wheel is operated abruptly more than 3/4 turn with center differential lock system activated.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(d) Vehicle height adjustment
31X049b
1 Higher 2 Lower
To change the mode, push the height select switch on either side of “ ” and “ ”.
The height control indicator light indicates which mode is
NOTICE
If you change the vehicle height frequently, the pump may overheat. To prevent this, the active height control suspension should be stopped temporarily for a minute between selections. Operate it again.
281
282
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before you lower the vehicle height with the height select switch, check under the vehicle to make sure that nothing to damage the vehicle or no one to be injured is there and the underbody of the vehicle does not touch the ground.
After unloading, the height of a vehicle equipped with the active height control suspension becomes slightly higher than the normal vehicle height. Take sufficient care where the overhead height is restricted.
The vehicle height cannot be raised if the vehicle load exceeds the following limits:
Up to 4 occupants* plus about 300 kg (661 lb.) in the normal mode
Up to 4 occupants* plus about 170 kg (375 lb.) in the high mode
*About 68 kg (150 lb.) for a person
If the above load capacity is exceeded, the desired vehicle height may not be obtained even if the height select switch is pushed. (If the vehicle height cannot be raised in the normal mode and the height control indicator indicates “LO”, this is because the vehicle is loaded too heavily. Under these conditions, drive your vehicle with due care.)
If the vehicle height cannot be raised even after unloading, push the height select switch on the “ ” side and then on the
“ ” side. If this does not work, turn off the ignition once and then turn on. Operate the select switch again.
If the vehicle height is adjusted on the slope, or with the selector lever in a position other than “P” or “N” while the vehicle is stopped, you may hear a sound caused by the expansion and contraction of the propeller shaft.
Selecting the high mode:
Push the height select switch on the “ ” side when the vehicle speed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph).
To change the normal mode to high, push the switch once.
To change the low mode to high, push the switch twice. It takes about 30 seconds until the low mode changes to the high mode.
Selecting the normal mode:
To change the high mode to normal, push the height select switch on the “ ” side once.
To change the low mode to normal, push the height select switch on the “ ” side once.
Selecting the low mode:
Push the height select switch on the “ ” side while the vehicle is stopped.
To change the high mode to low, push the switch twice.
To change the normal mode to low, push the switch once.
NOTICE
Do not select the low mode on bumpy roads. If the underbody of the vehicle touches the rugged road surface, the vehicle may be damaged.
Even if the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, the operation continues for up to 12 seconds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(e) Turning off the active height control suspension
31X051d
To turn off the active height control suspension with the vehicle stopped, push the height control switch. The height control “OFF” indicator light comes on and the vehicle height is fixed in the same mode as the height control switch is pushed.
This status is memorized in the system even after the engine is stopped.
If you push the switch again, the height control “OFF” indicator light goes out and the active height control suspension is turned on.
283
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
If you drive through deep water over about 500 mm (20 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the “HI” (High) mode with the height select switch and then turn off the active height control suspension by pushing the height control switch. Drive your vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lower speed.
NOTICE
When jacking up or installing tire chains, be sure to turn off the active height control suspension and stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
If your vehicle must be towed, put the vehicle height in the normal mode and turn off the active height control suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off the active height control suspension with the height control switch.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
284
Even after the active height control suspension is turned off with the height control switch, if the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km (19 mph), the active height control automatically selects the normal mode.
(f) Height control indicator lights
31X050d
1 Height control indicator lights
2 Height control “OFF” indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned on, all the indicator lights come on. The indicator light showing the present mode only remains on and all other lights go off after a few seconds. This means the system operates correctly.
If you change the vehicle height mode, the indicator lights change as follows:
31X052a
: Blinking : Illuminating
When changing the vehicle height from the normal mode to high:
1. The “N” (normal) mode indicator light goes off and the “HI”
(high) mode indicator light blinks.
2. After the vehicle height control reaches the high mode, the high mode indicator light remains on.
With the active height control suspension turned off, if you operate the height select switch or the vehicle height is changing depending on the vehicle speed, the vehicle height control enters the ready mode. In this case, the height control indicator lights change as follows:
1. The present mode indicator light comes on and at the same time the ready mode indicator light blinks.
2. When the active height control suspension is turned on, the present mode indicator light goes off and the ready mode indicator light blinks. (The vehicle height changes.)
STARTING AND DRIVING
3. After the vehicle height has changed completely, the changed mode indicator light stays on.
If the vehicle is loaded heavily, the vehicle height cannot be raised even if the height select switch is operated. If the underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on bumpy roads, the vehicle height cannot be lowered with the height select switch. The height control indicator lights change as follows:
1. The present mode indicator light goes off and the selected mode indicator light blinks.
2. The selected mode indicator light goes off. (The vehicle height does not change.) The present mode indicator light comes on again.
Height control “OFF” indicator light: When the ignition switch is turned on, this light comes on. If it goes out after a few seconds, the active height control suspension operates correctly. If you push the height control switch, the active height control is turned off. The height control “OFF” indicator light comes on.
In the following cases, there is a problem somewhere in your active height control suspension. Although there is no problem to continue normal driving, have the active height control suspension checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The height control “OFF” indicator light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned on.
The height control “OFF” indicator light blinks.
285
286
STARTING AND DRIVING
(g) Operation in cold weather
The active height control suspension does not operate in cold weather when the suspension fluid temperature drops below −30 C (−22 F).
In this case, operating the height select switch does not change the vehicle height. The vehicle height control enters the ready mode and the selected height control indicator light blinks. The active height control becomes operable if the engine is warmed up with the suspension fluid temperature being raised within normal operating limits. The vehicle changes to the selected height when the vehicle height control is in the ready mode.
When the suspension fluid temperature is around
−
30 C
(
−
22 F), the vehicle height cannot be raised even within the available load capacity. After warming up the engine, push the control switch on the “ ” side once and then on the “ ” side to select the desired vehicle height.
It takes longer to change the vehicle height when the suspension fluid temperature drops below −15 C (5 F).
(h) Parking and stopping tips
If you immediately stop the engine to park the vehicle after off
− road driving, the vehicle height is lowered slightly as the vehicle becomes cool. When parking, make sure there is nothing that will be in contact with the underbody of the vehicle.
When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.
If you park the vehicle for a long time, the vehicle height may gradually lower. When parking for a long time, make sure there is nothing that will come in contact with the underbody of the vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.
If you stop the engine, the vehicle height may change in accordance with the change in the temperature. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.
(i) Installing or removing heavy equipment
If you install or remove heavy equipment exceeding 15 kg (33 lb.), the front torsion bar should be adjusted. Consult your
Lexus dealer.
(j) Active height control failure warning
If there is a problem somewhere in the active height control suspension, the normal mode is automatically selected. If this occurs, the height control “OFF” indicator light blinks and the vehicle height control cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected.
Stop the engine and start it again. If the height control “OFF” indicator light goes out, the active height control suspension returns to normal. If the height control “OFF” indicator blinks again, bring your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible and have it checked.
STARTING AND DRIVING
ADAPTIVE VARIABLE SUSPENSION
(AVS)
This adaptive variable suspension adjusts the damping effect on the shock absorbers with the damping mode select switch. Select one of the 4 modes which is suited to the driving conditions with the damping mode select switch to provide good riding comfort and stability.
31X053c
1 For driving on a bumpy road
2 For ordinary driving such as in the city traffic
3 For moderate high speed driving
4 For sporty type driving such as on winding mountain roads and high speed driving
We recommend you to select the mode 2 for ordinary driving. The damping effect will be changed automatically to provide good riding comfort.
287
288
STARTING AND DRIVING
When your vehicle is loaded heavily or you are driving in an unpaved road, the mode 3 or 4 will be recommended. To provide good vehicle stability, the damping effect will be harder than for ordinary driving mode.
With the four
− wheel drive control lever at “L”, the damping effect suitable for off
− road driving will be provided.
ACTIVE TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM
31X518a
Active traction control system indicator light
The active traction control system automatically helps control the spinning of 4 wheels which may occur when accelerating on slippery road surfaces, by controlling the output of the brake and engine. Thus, the system assists driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels. When you turn the ignition switch on, the active traction control system always turns on automatically, and the active traction control indicator light will come on. The indicator light will go off after a few seconds.
When active traction control is applied, the active traction control system indicator light blinks.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the active traction control system is in the self
− check mode, and does not indicate malfunction. When the active traction control system is operating, you may feel vibration or hear noise of your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.
When getting the vehicle out of mud or newly fallen snow, etc., the active traction control system will help operate to prevent the wheels from spinning.
31X503
Active traction control system failure warning
This light warns when there is a problem somewhere in the active traction control system or vehicle stability control system.
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The brake actuator temperature increases during the active traction control system or vehicle stability control system operating. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while the active traction control system or vehicle stability control system is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the active traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place. If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sound will stop after about 3 seconds.) At the time the “VSC/TRAC” warning light will come on and the active traction control system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the active traction control system does not operate, there is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and “VSC/TRAC” warning light goes off if the accelerator pedal is released.
When the “ABS” warning light comes on, the active traction control system is not operating.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after a few seconds.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it goes off after a few seconds.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
“VSC/TRAC” warning light. It is normal if it goes off after a few seconds.
When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes on, the active traction control system is not operating, but there is no problem if you continue to drive.
289
290
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light does not come on after the ignition is turned to on.
The “VSC/TRAC” remains on after the ignition is turned to on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicles and power to 4 wheels may not be maintained, even though the active traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which will cause the vehicle to lose traction. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the road conditions present.
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL
SYSTEM
31X504
The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as anti−lock brakes, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding under adverse conditions.
When you turn the ignition switch on, the slip indicator light will come on. The slip indicator light will go off after a few seconds.
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The vehicle stability control system is activated when the vehicle speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the vehicle stability control is in the self
− check mode and does not indicate a malfunction.
31x505
31X529
Pushing the center differential lock button automatically turns the vehicle stability control system off. At this time, the “VSC
OFF” indicator comes on with the center differential lock indicator light. (For details, see “Four
− wheel drive system” on
Vehicle stability control system failure warning
These lights warn when there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system or active traction control system.
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. However, there is no problem even if the
“VSC/TRAC” warning light comes on when the brake actuator temperature becomes high. (For details, see “Active traction
When the “ABS” warning light comes on, the vehicle stability control system is not operating.
The lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after a few seconds.
The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go off after a few seconds.
291
292
STARTING AND DRIVING
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.
It is normal if they go off after a few seconds.
When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system is not operating, but there is no problem if you continue to drive.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light, “VSC OFF” indicator light and slip indicator light do not come on after the ignition is turned to on.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC OFF” indicator light remain on after the ignition is turned to on.
The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on while driving without pushing the center differential lock switch.
CAUTION
Active traction control system, vehicle stability control system and anti−lock brake system are electronic systems designed to help the driver maintain control under adverse conditions. They are not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether active traction control system, vehicle stability control system and anti−lock brake system will be effective in preventing a loss of control. Always keep safety driving in mind.
If the slip indicator light flashes, sounding an alarm, special care should be taken while driving.
Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your
Lexus dealer. (See “Checking and replacing tires” on
VARIABLE GEAR RATIO STEERING
SYSTEM
The variable gear ratio steering system adjusts the wheel turning angle depending on the vehicle speed and how much you turn the steering wheel.
The vehicle wheel turning angle will be changed with a smaller degree of wheel maneuvering when you are driving at very low speed such as when putting your vehicle into a garage.
In the following cases, to prevent the system from overheating, the system could be temporarily deactivated with the change in the center position of the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. After the cause of the problem is eliminated, the system will return to normal automatically after a few minutes.
If you continue maneuvering the steering wheel when the vehicle is stopped or running at very low speed
If you continue driving holding the steering wheel to the extreme right or left
If you maneuver the steering wheel immediately after starting the engine at less than about
−
30 C (
−
22 F)
STARTING AND DRIVING
While the system is not functioning, a larger degree of wheel maneuvering is needed during driving at low speed. If the center position of the steering wheel is changed frequently, have your vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Take due care especially when driving at low speed as the vehicle changes direction in greater proportion to the steering wheel maneuvering.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, or the center position of the steering wheel could be slightly and temporarily changed. However, after driving for a short while, the system will return to normal and the center position of the steering wheel will be in the appropriate position.
The light will flash if you disconnect and reconnect the battery terminal. This is because the system is reset temporarily.
However, it is no problem to drive. To turn off the light, drive for a short while. The system will be set automatically and return to normal.
293
294
STARTING AND DRIVING
Variable gear ratio steering system failure warning
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer.
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
31x500b
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the variable gear ratio steering system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the system is not working.
Although conventional steering operates when maneuvered, a larger degree of wheel maneuvering (than at the time when the system is functioning properly) is needed when driving at low speed. At this time, the center position of the steering wheel could be changed. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle repaired at your Lexus dealer.
BRAKE SYSTEM
This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Brake booster
The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power
− assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.
The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It is normal if the light turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light goes out and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid pressure reserve.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase.
Anti−lock brake system
The anti−lock brake system is designed to automatically help prevent lock−up of the wheels during a sudden brake or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti
− lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti
− lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
295
296
STARTING AND DRIVING
The anti
− lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti
− lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti
− lock brake system is in the self
− check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti
− lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.
At the end of the anti
− lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little to the forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock brake system:
Although the anti−lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti−lock brake system does not provide vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti−lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti−lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance.
“ABS” warning light
31X506
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti
− lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti
− lock brake system, the brake assist system, the active traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti
− lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
297
298
STARTING AND DRIVING
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
Drum−in−disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum
− in
− disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding
− down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding
− down.
Brake assist system
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds after the engine is started.
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS
warning light” on page 58 or 297.
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
31X020d
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the extent that replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
The tire pressure warning system warns you that the tire inflation pressure is low.
The tire pressure warning system is not a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.
CAUTION
The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.
299
300
STARTING AND DRIVING
31x608
Tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes off after a few seconds. This means the tire pressure warning light is operating properly. If the tire inflation pressure becomes low, the light comes on again. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few minutes. If the light blinks, the tire pressure warning system is not working properly.
Indicator status
ON
Blinking
Meanings
Tire inflation pressure is low
Tire pressure warning system malfunction
Do this
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
Have the system checked at your
Lexus dealer
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light comes on, be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn off the tire pressure warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light.
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label), you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under−inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under−inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
301
302
STARTING AND DRIVING
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start−ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement and alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire pressure warning valve and transmitter will be damaged.
When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by your Lexus dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.
If the tire pressure warning light blinks...
31x609
If the tire pressure warning light blinks when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the tire pressure warning system is not working properly.
The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered.
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.
If non
− genuine Lexus wheels are used.
If tire chains are used.
If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.
If the tire inflation pressure is 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm 2 or bar,
73 psi) or higher.
If the tire pressure warning light blinks frequently when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
303
304
STARTING AND DRIVING
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Replacing tires and wheels
When replacing the tires and wheels, be sure to install tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ID codes on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are registered on the tire pressure warning ECU. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the
ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction.
NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be replaced, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Tire pressure warning reset switch
31x612
When initializing the system, the present tire inflation pressure is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system determines decreased air pressure by comparing the present and the standard tire inflation pressures. When you change the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire pressure warning system.
When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.
When changing the tire size.
305
306
STARTING AND DRIVING
To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed tires to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (See “Tire and wheels” on
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
4. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times.
5. Wait for a few minutes with the ignition switch “ON”, and then turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch while the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally and initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the system again.
31x609
If the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly three times when you push and hold the reset switch, initialization has failed and the tire pressure warning system may not work properly. In this case, initialize the system again. If initialization cannot be performed, have the system checked at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Do not push the reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Tire pressure warning select switch
31x614a
1 Main position 2 2nd position
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered.
Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch.
There are 2 settings
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting, the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction.
307
308
STARTING AND DRIVING
SECTION
3
–
2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
310
DRIVING TIPS
OFF−ROAD VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
32X001d
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off−road applications.
Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low−slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to help minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
When driving off−road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes.
Driving straight up or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar off−road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
DRIVING TIPS
BREAK−IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break
− in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow.
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane rating).
311
312
DRIVING TIPS
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp
− edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work
Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h
(85 mph) unless your vehicle has high−speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high−speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely.
If you drive through deep water over about 500 mm
(20 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI (High) mode with the active height select switch and then turn off the active height control suspension by pushing the height control switch. Drive your vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lower speed.
DRIVING TIPS
OFF−ROAD DRIVING
PRECAUTIONS
When driving your vehicle off
− road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off
− road vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where off
− road vehicles are permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off
− road, consult the following organizations.
State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
State Motor Vehicle Bureau
Recreational Vehicle Clubs
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
313
314
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to help minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off−road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
When driving off−road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off−road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
DRIVING TIPS
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure you have a proper freeze protection for engine coolant.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 413 for
details of coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about
−
35 C (
−
31 F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of
55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about
−
42 C (
−
44 F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 450 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the battery charge level.
315
316
DRIVING TIPS
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather.
See page 412 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Lexus dealer
−
they will be pleased to help.
Check the electronic ignition system for loose connections or obvious damage.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de
− icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc.
DINGHY TOWING
32x602
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
DRIVING TIPS
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger
− and
− load carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for further details before towing.
CAUTION
When disconnecting a trailer, put the vehicle height in the “LO” (Low) mode and push the height control switch to turn off the active height control suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident. For details, see “Active height control
suspension (AHC)” on page 279.
317
318
DRIVING TIPS
Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
32X600b
Certification label
CAUTION
The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) must never exceed 2948 kg (6500 lb.) for vehicles with equipped. For details, contact your
Lexus dealer. If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. The combination of the gross trailer weight added to the total weight of the vehicle, occupants and vehicle cargo must never exceed a total of 5625 kg (12400 lb.).
Exceeding the maximum weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.
DRIVING TIPS
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load.
It also includes the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
32L002
Total trailer weight Tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11 % for weight carrying hitch
( * 1) or 15% for weight distributing hitch ( * 2) of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum load of the following:
Weight carrying hitch 295 kg (650 lb.)
Weight distributing hitch 442 kg (975 lb.)
Tongue load
Total trailer weight x 100= 9 to 11% ( * 1) or 15% ( * 2)
Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60 % of the trailer load should be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40
% in the rear.
319
320
DRIVING TIPS
Hitches
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you should consult with your Lexus dealer.
Use only a hitch recommended by the hitch manufacturer and the one which conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
The hitch must be bolted securely to the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.
The hitch ball and king pin should have a light coat of grease.
Lexus recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of additional damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is struck from behind. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
NOTICE
Do not use axle−mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. Also, never install a hitch which may interfere with the normal function of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so equipped.
Trailer ball
Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct trailer ball for your application:
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler.
Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.
The sizes you’ll most likely find stamped on the coupler are:
Trailer Class
III
II
Typical Trailer Ball Size
2
2 in.
in.
I 1 7/8 in.
2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load rating should be printed on the top of the ball.
32X004a
1 Trailer ball load rating 2 Ball diameter
3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter size.
DRIVING TIPS
Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
32x003d
1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball
321
322
DRIVING TIPS
Brakes and safety chains
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.
For correct safety chain procedures, consult your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
If the total trailer weight exceeds 453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are required.
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it will lower its braking effectiveness.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle.
If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over into another lane.
Tires
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure indicated below:
Tire inflation pressure, kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Front 220 (2.2, 32)
Rear 240 (2.4, 35)
The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total trailer weight.
Trailer lights
32x601b
Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the rear end underbody. Some models are fitted with a socket for trailer lights under the rear bumper. Use either of them to connect and operate the trailer lights. However, the trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights.
Break−in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
DRIVING TIPS
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance information in the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement /
Scheduled Maintenance”.
Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
Connecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
1. Put the active height control suspension in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the ignition switch off or push the height control switch to turn off the active height control suspension.
2. Connect a trailer.
3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the height control switch to turn on the active height control suspension. Select the “N”
(normal) mode with the height select switch.
When a vehicle loaded with 4 occupants tows a trailer of about
1800 kg (4000 lb.) with more than about 180 kg (400 lb.) tongue load, the normal mode may not be selected with the height control indicator “LO”. However, there is no problem to continue normal driving. Drive with sufficient care because of large load.
323
324
DRIVING TIPS
Disconnecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
1. Put the active height control suspension in the “LO” mode.
(Make sure the vehicle height is in the “LO” mode by pushing the height select switch on the “ ”side.)
2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the height control switch to turn off the active height control suspension.
3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 100 mm (4 in.).
4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the height control switch to turn on the active height control suspension.
5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered by the automatic leveling function.
6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 5.
7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” mode where the hitch does not touch anything in the “N” mode.
8. Put the active height control suspension in the “N” mode.
Pre−towing safety check
Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an abnormal nose
− up or nose
− down condition, and check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it cannot shift.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
Trailer towing tips
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing:
Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all vehicle
− trailer connections. After driving a short distance, stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from traffic until you learn the feel.
Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing to reduce the risk of an accident.
Because stopping distance may be increased, vehicle
− to
− vehicle distance should be increased when towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
DRIVING TIPS
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn to avoid the need of sudden braking.
Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than normal turning radius with your vehicle.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission must be “4” position.
325
326
DRIVING TIPS
Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over
30 C [85 F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 338.
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following:
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R” position.
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability
(swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding
72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy
−
just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving
−
but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.
Avoid engine over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are traveling.
DRIVING TIPS
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop
− and
− go driving wastes fuel.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc.
This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
327
328
DRIVING TIPS
Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating capacity are also described on the tire and loading information label. For location of the tire and loading information label, see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
Total load capacity: 545 kg (1200 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included when trailer towing.
Seating capacity: Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.
Towing capacity: 2948 kg (6500 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than each load limit.
That may cause not only damage to the tires, but also deterioration to the steering ability and braking ability, which may cause an accident.
DRIVING TIPS
CARGO AND LUGGAGE
Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in or on the vehicle, observe the following:
Put cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
CAUTION
To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.
329
330
DRIVING TIPS
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.
NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity weight specified on the tire pressure label.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
DRIVING TIPS
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see page 317.
Example on your vehicle
32SA03
1
Cargo capacity
2
Total load capacity
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg
(366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load capacity of 545 kg (1200 lb.), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
545 kg – 166 kg = 379 kg.
(1200 lb. – 366 lb. = 834 lb.)
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
379 kg – 176 kg = 203 kg.
(834 lb. – 388 lb. = 446 lb.)
331
332
DRIVING TIPS
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in the number of occupants causes the excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident.
Seating configuration variation
32X504
1
2
Cargo capacity
Weight of removed third seat
In case of removing the third seat, it is possible to load as much cargo as the weight of the removed seat.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants) + (Weight of the removed third seat)
Third seat weight:
Right
Left
20 kg (44 lb.)
20 kg (44 lb.)
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
334
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving ...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try starting the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work, so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the
engine” on page 258 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer system, also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Lexus dealer.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly −
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See
“Foreword”.)
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three−way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start −
1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
See “(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the ignition key to “START” with the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and hold the key at this position for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking hold function stops cranking automatically, and you can try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See “Foreword”.)
335
336
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct.
40X032
5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality.
Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (
−
) terminals of each battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
1 Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2 Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3 Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(
−
) terminal of the booster battery.
4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (e.g.
engine hanger) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Charge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
6. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable.
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now contain sulfuric acid.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If another attempt is not successful, the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer.
337
338
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE
ENGINE SPEED
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, the electronic throttle control system may be faulty. Move the vehicle to a safe place by means of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for assistance:
1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position.
2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
The above method of moving the vehicle is for emergency. Use it only for moving minimum distances to a safe place.
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of very high pressure.
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
Is the cooling fan operating?
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus dealer.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible by your Lexus dealer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.
Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
−
well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Turn off the active height control suspension by pushing the active height control switch.
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle supported by a jack. Personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
339
340
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair.
40X002d
On the left side of the luggage compartment
1
Tool bag
2
Jack
1. Get the tool, jack and spare tire.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage locations.
When storing the jack, put it into place and secure to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X041 40X069a
1
3
Jack handle end
2
Jack handle extension
Jack handle
To remove the spare tire under the luggage compartment:
Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
Make sure they are securely fixed with the screws.
When connecting a jack handle extension with a jack handle end, use a jack handle to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown in the illustration. When connecting the jack handle with extension, tighten the wing bolt on the joint securely. Make sure the hollow meets the bolt on every joint when you tighten the bolts.
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise, the extension may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.
341
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X003f 40X004g
342
1
Lower
2
Raise
3
Paper
To remove the spare tire:
1. Remove the spare tire carrier lid using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise with the handle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.
3. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.
When storing the spare tire, put it in place with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
When blocking a wheel, place a wheel block in front of the front wheels or behind the rear wheels.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X005d 40X006c
Paper for protecting surface
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel ornament remover as shown.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
4.
Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.
To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above.
Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet
−
just unscrew them about one
− half turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.
343
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X035e
Front
40X036b
344
Rear
5. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface.
JACK POINTS:
Front − Under the chassis frame side rail at the No.2
body mount bracket
Left rear
−
Under the rear axle housing
Right rear
−
Under the bracket on the rear axle housing
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X038 40X069a
1
3
Jack handle end
2
Jack handle extensions
Jack handle
Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration .
CAUTION
Make sure they are securely fixed with the screws.
When connecting a jack handle extension with a jack handle end, use a jack handle to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown in the illustration. When connecting the jack handle with extension, tighten the wing bolt on the jack handle securely. Make sure the hollow meets the bolt on any joint when you tighten the bolts.
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise, the extension may come off and it may damage the paint or vehicle body.
345
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X008d 40X009c
346
6. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle extension into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with the handle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double
− check that it is properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X010a 40X011c
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.
Installation of wheels without good metal
− to
− metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving. Therefore after the first 1600 km (1000 miles), check to see that the wheel nuts are tight.
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them more.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.
347
348
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X012c
9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts.
To lower the vehicle, turn the jack handle extension counterclockwise with the handle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.
Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
CAUTION
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf.), as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.
Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.
40X013c
10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Put the wheel ornament into position and then tap it firmly with the side or heel of your hand to snap it into place.
CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
11. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage . If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.
349
350
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward.
Turn off the active traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle
stability control system” on page 290.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing.
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 355.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.
Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is towed, put the vehicle height in the
“N” (Normal) mode and push the height control switch to turn off the height control suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed because of the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
For details, see “Active height control suspension
351
352
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From front
From rear
40X020a
40X019a
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.
(b) Using a flat bed truck
40X014b
Tie down points
40X015a
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X016c
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied down at locations A and B as shown above.
40X017d
Rear emergency towing hook
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing hook.
353
354
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Tie down angle
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
40X018c 40X021b
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded black must be at 45 .
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage.
(d) Emergency towing
40x600a
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard
− surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
NOTICE
Do not use front and rear eyelets. It is not designed for towing.
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.
Before towing, check that the center differential is unlocked.
(The indicator light must be off with the ignition on.) Release the parking brake and put the transmission in “N”. The ignition key must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running).
355
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
356
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.
Emergency towing hook precautions:
Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.
To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
If the emergency towing hook is used to get out when your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the hook and the towing cable or chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.
If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:
The following methods are effective to use when your vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or chain when towing.
Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the tires.
Place stones or wood under the tires.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SELECTOR LEVER
40X024e
40X023e
If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock override button as follows:
1 Turn the ignition key to “LOCK” or “ACC”. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Pry up the cover with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
2 Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift the selector lever while pushing the button.
For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
357
358
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
LEXUS LINK SYSTEM
(If equipped)
31x522b
1 PTT (Push To Talk) button 2 Volume button
3 Phone button 4 “SERVICES” button
5 Emergency button
The Lexus Link System is an in−vehicle communications service that provides you with enhanced safety, security and convenience. With an active subscription you can push the “SERVICES” button for operator assistance or in an emergency situation such as a vehicle accident (in which the airbag was activated), you will automatically be connected to the Lexus Link Call Center which will assist you and/or send help 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The Lexus Link System can also record your conversation with the Lexus Link Call Advisor.
Safety information for the Lexus Link System
Important!: Read this information before using the Lexus
Link System.
EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS
The Lexus Link System to be installed in your vehicle is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When the ignition is turned to the “ON” position, it receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
ANSI C95.1 (1992)* 1
NCRP Report 86 (1986)*
2
ICNIRP (1996)* 3
* 1 : American National Standards Institute
* 2 : National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements
* 3 : International Commission on Non
−
Ionizing Radiation
Protection
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of the Lexus Link System complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Information for using the Lexus Link System
The Lexus Link System is a subscription
− based service. To obtain any of the Lexus Link services you must have enrolled with the Lexus Link Call Center and have an active subscription. It is important to be aware that an active subscription is required to receive safety and security services.
To learn more about your subscription status or how to renew or extend your subscription, please push the “SERVICES” button and speak to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1
−
800
−
25 Lexus (Toll
−
Free) (1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. If you are not enrolled, you will hear the explanation about the Lexus Link System. The actual
message is shown on “Audible voice prompts” on page 381.
If you push the “SERVICES” button again, you will be connected to the Lexus Link Call Center for enrollment. To cancel the enrollment call, push the phone button.
NOTICE
This system is only operational in GPS (Global
Positioning System) and cellular coverage areas.
Services may not be available in an area where the GPS and cellular phone signals cannot be received.
359
360
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
INFORMATION
Operating the Lexus Link System during the use of
Bluetooth phone will terminate a Bluetooth phone call.
40x604a
1 Lexus Link System indicator light (green)
2 Lexus Link System warning light (red)
When the ignition is turned to the “ON” position, the warning light comes on for 2 seconds, then goes off. As soon as it goes out, the indicator light comes on. This means the Lexus Link
System is operating properly. The indicator light should remain on to inform you that you have an active subscription. If your
Lexus Link subscription has expired, the indicator light should go off. To activate your Lexus Link System, press the
“SERVICES” button. To learn more about your subscription status or how to renew or extend your subscription, please push the “SERVICES” button to speak to a Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1
−
800
−
25 Lexus (Toll
−
Free)
(1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. If problems are detected in the Lexus Link System, the warning light comes on or you will hear “A system error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.” In either case, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
In some cases, even if your subscription has expired, the indicator light may come on. This is due to the time delay required to process the deactivation of your Lexus Link
System. During this period, when you push the “SERVICES” button, your call will be forwarded to enrollment. Once the deactivation process has been completed, the indicator light will go off.
NOTICE
The indicator light is the primary means to let you know the status of your subscription. It is important to be aware that an active subscription is required to receive safety and security services. If the indicator light is disabled, your subscription has expired. If you would like to renew your subscription for Lexus Link services, please contact Lexus Link Call Center by pushing the
“SERVICES” button twice, dial toll free 1−800−25 Lexus
(Toll−Free) (1−800−255−3987) and select the option for
Lexus Link, or contact your Lexus dealer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Automatic notifications of airbag deployment
If an airbag deploys, an emergency signal is sent automatically to the Lexus Link Call Center. In your vehicle, the system announces “Impact detected, connecting to Lexus Link
Emergency.” In response to the signal, the Lexus Link Advisor will attempt to communicate with you first. If the advisor cannot get any response from you, the advisor will locate your vehicle through the GPS, call the nearest emergency services provider, describe the situation and your location. If necessary, the advisor will transfer your call to the emergency services operator.
NOTICE
This system is only operational in GPS and cellular coverage areas. Upon subscription expiration, all
Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, remote door locking/unlocking function, remote horn and lights function) are deactivated.
361
362
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Manual emergency calling
40x605a
You can place an emergency call manually. Push the emergency button. You will hear “Connecting to Lexus
Link Emergency.” Upon reception of your call, the advisor will locate your vehicle and contact you to assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider. This emergency call should only be made in life−threatening situations.
If you push the emergency button accidentally, wait until the
Lexus Link advisor answers. Explain to the advisor that emergency assistance is not necessary.
NOTICE
This system is only operational in GPS and cellular coverage areas. Upon subscription expiration, all
Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, remote door locking/unlocking function, remote horn and lights function) are deactivated.
If your vehicle is stolen
If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at
1
−
800
−
25
−
LEXUS (Toll
−
Free) (1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. The Center will connect you to the appropriate authority for you to file a theft report. The Center will locate, track and provide location information to the appropriate police authority. To protect subscriber privacy, the
Lexus Link Call Center will not provide the location of a vehicle to anyone other than a law enforcement authority.
Other Services
40x606a
When you push the “SERVICES” button, you will hear
“Connecting to Lexus Link”. Your location and system ID are automatically transmitted to the advisors that provide services. The services provided will depend on the level of service package selected.
For details about various services that are available, contact your Lexus dealer, or push the “SERVICES” button and speak to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1
−
800
−
25
Lexus (Toll
−
Free) (1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for
Lexus Link.
To cancel a services call, push the phone button. “Lexus Link request ended” will be announced.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If problems are detected in the Lexus Link System, the warning light comes on or you will hear “A system error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.” In either case, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Lexus Link services may not be available in the following cases.
The components or wire harnesses for the system are damaged.
The Lexus Link Call Center is not operational.
The antenna does not work properly due to vehicle damage.
In a weak or non
− cellular coverage area.
Your vehicle is in area where the GPS signal is weak or cannot be received.
The Lexus Link subscription has expired.
NOTICE
Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services
(i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, remote door locking/unlocking function, remote horn and lights function) are deactivated.
363
364
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking by Lexus
Link System
The Lexus Link System will allow your vehicle to be locked and unlocked remotely.
If you find that your vehicle has not been locked, call the Lexus
Link Call Center 1
−
800
−
25
−
LEXUS (Toll
−
Free)
(1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link, the
Lexus Link Advisor can assist in locking your vehicle.
In case you are locked out, call the Lexus Link Call Center
1
−
800
−
25 Lexus (Toll
−
Free) (1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link, a Lexus Link Advisor can assist in unlocking your vehicle.
Remote Horn and Lights by Lexus Link
System
The Lexus Link System can flash your headlights and sound your horn remotely.
Whether you are parked on a city street or in a stadium parking lot, Lexus Link makes it easy to locate your vehicle quickly.
Call the Lexus Link Call Center 1
−
800
−
25
−
LEXUS (Toll
−
Free)
(1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus Link. A
Lexus Link Advisor will flash your headlights and sound your horn so you can find your vehicle.
NOTICE
You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your
Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) before they lock/unlock your vehicle or activate a remote horn and lights. However, the Lexus Link System will not be able to lock or unlock your vehicle or perform lights flashing/remote horn if it has been parked for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e.
automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, remote door locking/unlocking function, remote horn and lights function) are deactivated.
Personal calling Advisor record
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40X607 40x608
1 PTT (Push To Talk) button 2 Phone button
Personal calling provides you with a nationwide wireless phone service that is completely integrated into your vehicle.
To place a phone call,
1. Push the PTT or the phone button.
2. Say a few simple voice commands to dial.
3. Push the phone button to end a call.
To receive a phone call, push the phone button.
While the call is being received, you may hear ring tones and see indicator light flashes. You have about 30 seconds to answer an incoming call. If you do not depress the phone button during this time, the incoming call will be terminated.
For details, ask your Lexus dealer or see the “Voice
1 PTT (Push To Talk) button 2 Volume button
3 Phone button 4 “SERVICES” button
During a service call, you can record a conversation with the
Lexus Link Call Center Advisor. This function is very convenient for drivers so they do not have to take notes while driving.
To record: Push “SERVICES” button to record a conversation with Lexus Link Call Center. At this time, you will hear beeps.
To stop recording, push the button again. Up to about 2 minutes of recording time is available.
When you push the “SERVICES” button, all previous messages are deleted and the system begins recording your new message.
365
366
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To playback: Push the PTT or phone button and “Lexus Link ready” will be announced. Then say “Advisor playback” to play the recorded conversation. To stop the playback, push the phone button. To restart the playback, say “Advisor playback” and then “Resume” for resuming or “Play” for starting from the beginning.
To change the volume: Push the volume button on either side to adjust the volume. When you change the volume, one beep sounds.
Lexus Link System indicator and warning lights
40x604a
1 Lexus Link System indicator light (green)
2 Lexus Link System warning light (red)
When the indicator light remains on, you have an active subscription. You can obtain any of the Lexus Link services available in your package.
When the indicator light starts flashing, a call to the Lexus
Link Call Center is being connected or in progress.
When the warning light remains on, there is any problem with the Lexus Link system. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the indicator and warning lights go off, your subscription has expired.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Voice Recognition
You can start voice recognition by pressing the phone or
PTT button. Although either button works the same way, use the PTT button during a call.
Pressing the phone button during a call will terminate the call.
Some English audible voice prompts can be changed to
Spanish. For details, see “Audible voice prompts” on page
ADVISOR PLAYBACK
Your Lexus Link system is equipped with an advisor playback recorder to store information given to you during a call with a
Lexus Link Advisor. You can play back the stored audio information at a later time, when you are no longer connected to Lexus Link.
To record a conversation only during a call with Lexus
Link Call Center:
1. Press the “SERVICES” button.
You will hear beeps and recording starts. Note that start of recording may be delayed up to five seconds to clear existing audio information. Recording starts immediately after the last beep.
2. Press the “SERVICES” button again.
Recording ends.
367
368
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To play back (only when the Lexus Link System is not in a call):
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Advisor playback”.
The playback will start.
To stop the playback (partially through):
1. Press the phone* button.
The system will terminate the playback and return to audio system control.
*: The PTT button cannot be used instead of the phone button.
To resume the playback:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Advisor playback”.
You will hear “Play or resume?”.
3. Say “Play” or “Resume”.
If you say “Play”, the playback will start from the beginning. If you say “Resume”, the playback will start from where it had been previously stopped.
PERSONAL CALLING
As a Lexus Link subscriber, the personal calling capability is there for you just in case your hand−held cell phone is lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. Personal calling is integrated into your vehicle and can be activated during your Lexus Link account activation or by pressing the blue “SERVICES” button at any time and telling the advisor that you would like to activate personal calling.
You can prepurchase a package of minutes that works best for you. They are easily billed to a credit card that you can keep on file so no separate phone bill is needed. Plus, you will not have to pay an activation fee, and there are no additional long distance or roaming charges.
Personal calling universal commands:
“Help”
The system will provide a list of available commands.
“Clear”
When you are entering digits, this command will erase the last digit entered.
“Cancel”
This command takes you from the current function to the
“Lexus Link ready” prompt. If the last response from the system was “Lexus Link ready”, this command will exit personal calling.
PLACING A CALL:
There are 5 ways to place a call.
1. To dial a specific telephone number, say “Dial”.
2. To dial a specific telephone number, say “Digit dial”.
This option is specifically used in noisy situation when the dial command is not performing well.
3. To use a stored nametag (speed dial), say “Call”.
4. To dial the last number called, say “Redial”.
5. To dial a number a Lexus Link Advisor downloaded to your vehicle, say “Number recall”.
To dial a number using “Dial”:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Dial”.
You will hear “Phone number to dial, please”.
3. Say the entire phone number you wish to dial with no pauses.
Lexus Link will repeat the number, then you will hear “Yes or
No”.
4. Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
You will hear “Dialing” and your call (or “No” to try again) will be connected.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
INFORMATION
If you get a “Pardon” response as soon as you begin saying the number, this means you spoke too quickly after the “Phone number to dial, please” response.
Just repeat the entire number again.
If you gave the entire number to dial and you received a “Pardon” response, that means the system did not hear all the digits of the phone number. Say the number again and be sure you do not pause between digits.
After 3 unsuccessful tries (pardons), you will be prompted to the digit dial format. This lets you dial each digit individually and should be more successful for you.
369
370
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To dial a number using digit dial:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Digit dial”.
You will hear “First digit to dial, please”.
3. Say the number to be dialed, one digit at a time.
Lexus Link will confirm each digit by repeating it back to you.
Wait for confirmation before going on.
4. When finished, say “Dial” again.
You will hear “Dialing” and your call will be connected.
INFORMATION
If the number you spoke is repeated incorrectly, just say “Clear” and the last number will be erased. Try saying the number again.
If you get a “Pardon” response, no digit was recorded by the system; just try again. See “VOICE
COMMANDS/SPEECH RECOGNITION” on page 377
for more tips.
If you have trouble getting numbers correctly into the system, store up to 20 frequently called numbers using the nametag feature directory, so the system will remember them. After you have stored a number with a nametag, then you simply say “Call” and the nametag in order to call the number.
To differentiate pound and star from other numbers and commands, you must use the commands
“Pound key” and “Star key”.
To place a call using a stored nametag:
See “STORING/DELETING NUMBERS IN MEMORY
(NAMETAGS)” on page 374 for instructions on how to set up
nametags.
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Call”.
You will hear “Nametag, please”.
3. Say the stored name.
You will hear “Calling” (nametag you said).
To place a call using the “Redial” command:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Redial”.
You will hear “Redialing (number)”.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To recall a number from Lexus Link:
The Lexus Link Advisor can download a phone number from the Lexus Link database to your personal calling system. You can dial it at a later time using personal calling.
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Number recall”.
You will hear “Connecting to number recall”.
RECEIVING A CALL
If someone calls your wireless phone number, you will hear a phone−ringing sound and the green indicator light on the overhead console flashes. To answer the call, simply press the phone button. If you are not answering within 30 seconds, the system will terminate receiving the call.
ENDING A CALL
When your call is finished, press the phone button to end the call. It is not possible to end a call using voice commands.
371
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
372
ACCESSING VOICEMAIL AND SENDING NUMBER
TONES TO AUTOMATED SYSTEMS
The voice−activated key pad feature of personal calling allows access to most voicemail system. It also allows you to respond to number requests from computer systems, such as “Press 1 for sales; press 2 for service”.
Once you receive the request for a number while in a call, press the PTT button on the overhead console. Note that this feature works only during a call.
If you press the PTT button and do not speak a command within 5 seconds, or if you press the button a second time, the system will respond with “Good
− bye”. This means the system exited the PTT command and your original call is still connected. Press the PTT button to try again.
Voice activated keypad example:
1. Connect a call using the personal calling.
2. Press the PTT button.
You will hear “First digit to send, please”.
3. Say the first number.
You will hear the number you said or tone.
4. Say the second number.
You will hear the number you said or tone.
5. Continue to say the succeeding numbers one by one until finished.
Lexus Link will confirm each number by repeating it back to you.
6. Say “Dial”.
Lexus Link sends the numbers requested, then returns to the call.
Voicemail example:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Call”.
You will hear “Nametag, please”.
3. Say “Voicemail” (previously stored).
You will hear “Calling voicemail”. You will hear ringing and then
“You have reached the voicemail for company. If you are subscriber, press pound.”
4. Press the PTT button.
You will hear “First digit to send, please”.
5. Say “Pound key”.
You will hear “Pound key”.
6. Say “Dial”.
Lexus Link sends tone and you will hear “Mailbox number, please”.
7. Press the PTT button.
You will hear “First digit to send, please”.
8. Say “Four”.
You will hear “Four”.
9. Say “Six”.
You will hear “Six”.
10.Say “Zero”.
You will hear “Zero”.
11. Say “Eight”.
You will hear “Eight”.
12.Say “Dial”.
Lexus Link sends tones. Voicemail will respond to 4608.
Automated system example:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Call”.
You will hear “Nametag, please”.
3. Say “Business”.
You will hear “Calling business”. “To talk to engineering, press
1; to talk to sales, press 2; to talk to customer care, press 3.”
4. Press the PTT button.
You will hear “First digit to send, please”.
5. Say “One”.
You will hear “One”.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
6. Say “Dial”.
Lexus Link sends tone. The system will respond to the number
1.
INFORMATION
To differentiate pound and star from other numbers and commands, you must use the commands
“Pound key” and “Star key”.
The Lexus Link voice−activated keypad understands only numbers, star key and pound key. It does not understand stored nametags.
You can erase the last number entered by saying
“Clear”.
373
374
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
STORING/DELETING NUMBERS IN MEMORY
(NAMETAGS)
Your Lexus Link System can store up to 20 phone numbers. These numbers can be dialed by simply saying
“Call”, then saying the nametag.
Tips for creating nametags:
Short nametags that are similar may be easily confused by the system. You may get better recognition of your nametags if you make them longer, for example “George
Washington” (no pause), instead of “George” only.
The best way to store a nametag is when it is quiet inside the vehicle. The vehicle should be stationary and the air conditioning fan turned off.
When you have finished speaking your phone number, you do not need to say “Store number” or “Dial” to indicate that you are done. If you pause and say nothing, the system will ask you if you want to store or dial. Say “Yes”.
To store a nametag:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Store”.
You will hear “Phone number to store, please”.
3. Say the number you wish to store with no pauses.
Lexus Link will repeat the number, then you will hear “Yes or
No”.
4. Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
You will hear “Nametag, please” (or Number not stored).
5. Say “(new nametag)”.
You will hear “About to store (new nametag)” and “Does that sound OK?”
6. Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
You will hear “Storing (new nametag)”.
To store a nametag using digit store:
This is similar to digit dial where you enter numbers one at a time.
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Digit store”.
You will hear “First digit to store, please”.
3. Say the number to be dialed, one digit at a time.
Lexus Link will confirm each digit by repeating it back to you.
4. When finished, say “Store”.
You will hear “Storing nametag, please”.
5. Say “(new nametag)”.
You will hear “About to store (new nametag)” and “Does that sound OK?”
6. Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
You will hear “Storing (new nametag)”.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To delete a nametag:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Delete”.
You will hear “Nametag, please”.
3. Say “(nametag)”.
You will hear “Delete (nametag), Yes or No”.
4. Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
You will hear “Deleting (nametag)”.
To list your nametags:
Use the “Directory” command to list your nametags.
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Directory”.
Lexus Link will list your nametags.
375
376
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
VERIFYING REMAINING UNITS (MINUTES)
Lexus Link keeps track of the amount of calling time you have purchased and used in units. The number of total remaining units is stored within the Lexus Link System, and can be accessed easily. Lexus Link will also notify you at the beginning of a call if you have 10 or fewer calling minutes remaining.
To verify remaining minutes:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Units”.
You will hear “Verify or add”.
3. Say “Verify”.
You will hear “You have <#> units remaining”.
To add more calling units (minutes):
You can charge additional calling units by connecting Lexus
Link.
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Units”.
You will hear “Verify or add”.
3. Say “Add”.
You will hear “Connecting to the Personal Calling Center”.
AUTOMATIC CONTACT TO LEXUS LINK FOR
REPLENISHMENT
If you run out of units during a call, your call will be terminated and you will be connected to Lexus Link to replenish minutes.
RETRIEVING YOUR PHONE NUMBER
To determine your phone number so that others can call your vehicle.
To retrieve your phone number
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “My number”.
Lexus Link will respond with your number.
SECURITY CODE/LOCKING YOUR SYSTEM
You can set up a 4−digit personal security code to ensure that unauthorized people do not use the calling capability of your system. With security code set to on, the system will respond with “Security code on” to any personal call, including 911, or an advanced services request. With the security code on, only calls from the Lexus Link Call
Center will be presented.
Before calls can be made or received, you must turn the security code off.
To turn on/off the security:
1. Press the phone button.
You will hear “Lexus Link ready”.
2. Say “Security”.
You will hear “Enter first digit of code, please”.
3. Say your 4−digit code one digit at a time.
Lexus Link will confirm each digit by repeating it back to you.
After the fourth digit, you will hear “Security (Code ####) is now on/off”.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
VOICE COMMANDS / SPEECH RECOGNITION
Operation of the Lexus Link speech recognition systems:
Speech recognition allows the user to speak to a computer.
The computer tries to understand the user’s command, and responds by speaking back or by taking the appropriate action
(e.g., dialing the phone).
Personal calling uses a speech recognition system that is built in the vehicle. When the user presses the phone or PTT button, the system says “Lexus Link ready”, and listens for the user’s command. The user can speak commands to control the hands
− free wireless phone.
Performance of speech recognition:
The Lexus Link speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed to understand a wide range of speakers of American English. However, the technology does not work equally well across all regional and ethnic accents.
The Lexus Link voice recognition system may not work with all voices.
Although there is no one right way to speak English, the system will work best when you try to modify their pronunciation in response to system errors. If you do not obtain good results, try the tips found on the following pages.
377
378
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Voice command error messages:
“Pardon”
The system has not been able to match your command with a word that it knows. Repeating the command distinctly should fix the problem. After 3 pardon responses, the system will try to guess the command you are requesting. If correct, say
“Yes”, if not, say “No” and the system will prompt you with its next
− best guess.
“Slower, please”
Repeat the command after a short pause. This response normally happens if you say a command before the system is ready for it or if there is substantial background noise.
General tips for better speech recognition:
<Noise>
Noise may confuse the speech recognition system. You usually get better performance from the system in quieter conditions:
The air conditioning/heater fan creates noise. Turn it down or off for better speech system performance.
Driving at high speeds creates louder engine noise and wind noise. You may get better results at lower speeds.
An open window or an open moon roof results in more noise in the vehicle. Close all windows for better results.
Noisy rainstorms can also reduce performance.
If passengers are talking while you use the speech system, it may be confused by their speech. You will get better results if all occupants of the vehicle are quiet while the system is listening for commands.
<When to speak>
Personal calling—the system is only listening for about 5 seconds after it prompts you to speak. If the system does not hear a response, it will prompt you again, or cancel the transaction. If you begin to speak too soon, it will tell you
“Slower, please”. Try pausing for a half second before speaking.
<How to speak>
Speak forcefully and clearly. The noisier the environment, the louder you need to speak. If you are in the driver’s seat, speak facing the front of the vehicle. If you are a passenger, speak facing the rearview mirror.
Speak calmly and naturally. The system may sometimes fail to hear your repeated attempts to give a command. If your speech is distorted by shouting or frustration, this may cause more errors.
People with high
− pitched voices may have better results by speaking in a deeper, lower
− pitched voice. However, do not lower the volume of the voice.
Avoid speaking with a rising intonation, like asking a question. Use a flat or falling intonation, like giving an answer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
<What to say>
Personal calling: one−word commands
Commands—The personal calling system listens for only one word at a time. (There are some exceptions: two
− word phrases that are spoken and understood as a single word, e.g., “Advanced services” and “My number”.)
Numbers—When inputting a phone number, the personal calling system listens for a continuous string of digits. It can recognize 7
−
, 10
−
, and 11
− digit numbers as well as the number 911. When inputting security codes or voice
− activated keypad numbers, you must say them one digit at a time.
Say “Help” at the “Lexus Link ready” prompt to hear the list of personal calling commands.
379
380
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Tips for entering a phone number using the dial and store commands:
Say the entire 7
−
, 10
−
or 11
− digit number and wait for the system to respond. You do not need to say “Dial”, “Store”, or “Verify” after the phone number.
If you want to enter a number that is not 7
−
, 10
−
or 11
− digit, use the digit dial or digit store commands.
Do not pause between the digits. If there is a long pause between digits, the system may think that you have finished saying the entire number.
The system does not recognize the words “Hundred” or
“Thousand”. Instead, you must say each digit. For example, a number starting with “1
−
800 ..” is pronounced
“one
− eight
− zero
− zero...”.
The system often works better when the digits are combined smoothly into a single phrase. Try saying the entire phone number more rapidly.
If problems continue when saying the entire phone number, try using the digit dial or digit store commands to enter one digit at a time.
<If problems continue>
Say each one of the syllables in the word clearly. Do not omit any of the syllables.
Be sure to articulate each sound in the word. The voice recognition system can have trouble recognizing a word when final consonants are not pronounced. It may be helpful to emphasize the final consonant.
If the system is confusing 2 commands that are similar (e.g.
“Dial” and “Redial”), be sure to pronounce the distinction. In this example, “Redial” may be recognized better if the first syllable is emphasized and slightly lengthened.
Avoid clipping short words and syllables. Instead, try lengthening the short words and syllables, and slow down your overall speech rate a little. You can also try lengthening different syllables of the word.
Try speaking louder. When there is a lot of background noise, the system has more trouble hearing your speech. If, however, you find that you are speaking so loud that you are stressing your voice, speaking somewhat quieter but with clear pronunciation may help.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Audible voice prompts
The following table shows the voice responses from the Lexus Link System.
Some English audible voice prompts can be changed to Spanish. To change the language, press the “SERVICES” button and ask a Lexus Link Advisor.
NOTE: Even if you have Spanish voice prompts , voice recognition language cannot be changed to Spanish.
Voice phrase (English)
Hello and welcome to Lexus Link. For
Lexus Link services, contact a Lexus
Link Advisor by pressing the
“SERVICES” button again. For additional information, visit us online at
Lexus.com in the owner section or talk to your Lexus dealer.
Impact detected, connecting to Lexus
Link Emergency
Voice phrase (Spanish)
N/A (English only)
Explanation
The “SERVICES” button is pushed without an active subscription.
Connecting to Lexus Link Emergency
Connecting to Lexus Link
Lexus Link ready
Lexus Link request ended
Impacto detectado. Conectando con
Emergencia de Lexus Link
Conectando con Emergencia de Lexus
Link
Conectando con Lexus Link
N/A (English only)
Fin de llamada Lexus Link
In response to the airbag deployment, an emergency call will be placed automatically.
The emergency button is pushed with an active subscription.
The “SERVICES” button is pushed with an active subscription.
The PTT or phone button is pushed, indicating the beginning of voice recognition.
The phone button is pushed in a call and the call is cancelled.
381
382
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Voice phrase (English)
Unable to contact Lexus Link
The Lexus Links system is not active.
A system error has been detected.
Please contact your Lexus dealer.
Voice phrase (Spanish)
No pude conectarme con Lexus Link
Su servicio Lexus Link no ha sido activado.
Un error en el sistema ha sido detectado. Por favor contacte su concesionario Lexus.
Explanation
A call is attempted, but failed.
The emergency button is pushed without an active subscription.
As a substitute of the faulty warning light
Lexus Link transceiver antenna
31x526
The Lexus Link transceiver antenna is removable. Before taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash, disconnect the antenna by unscrewing it from the roof mount.
When you remove the antenna, make sure the ignition is turned off.
Use only the supplied or an approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the
Lexus Link System and may violate FCC regulations.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Persons who use a medical appliance like a pacemaker should not touch or come in close contact with the antenna while the vehicle ignition is on. Otherwise, the cellular signals may produce improper operation of a medical appliance.
NOTICE
Do not contact with the antenna, this may affect quality of transceiver’s operation and may cause the unit to operate at a higher power level than needed.
If you forget reattaching the Lexus Link transceiver antenna, the Lexus Link System may not function properly.
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is removed before driving your vehicle through an automatic car wash.
383
384
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you can give them the key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you using special tools. If your vehicle is equipped with Lexus Link
System, call the Lexus Link Call Center 1
−
800
−
25
−
LEXUS
(Toll
−
Free) (1
−
800
−
255
−
3987) and select the option for Lexus
Link. Once you provide the Lexus Link Call Center Advisor with your Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number), they will unlock your vehicle.
NOTICE
You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your
Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) before they lock/unlock your vehicle or activate a remote horn and lights. However, the Lexus Link System will not be able to lock or unlock your vehicle or perform lights flashing/remote horn if it has been parked for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off. Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e.
automatic notification, emergency call functions, service call functions, remote door locking/unlocking function, remote horn and lights function) are deactivated.
If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid glass cuts.
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
. . . . . . . .
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
385
386
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well as day
− to
− day care is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble
− free, safe, and economical driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance services, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day
− to
− day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or your Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system.
The owner may elect to use non−Lexus supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Lexus technicians are well
− trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in
− dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems on your vehicle.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle
−
reliably and economically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Lexus.
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do
− it
− yourself mechanic, the Lexus service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do
− it
− yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See your “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
Engine compartment
Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 458 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower lines on the see
− through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 413 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 414 for
additional information.
387
388
MAINTENANCE
Battery
Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however,
see page 450 for additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 421 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 410 for additional
information.
Suspension fluid level
Make sure the suspension fluid level is correct. See page 423
for additional information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 422 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 255.)
Vehicle interior
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free play or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. For folding
− down rear seatbacks, swing
− up rear seat cushions and detachable third seats, check that the latches lock securely.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in “P” position and all brakes released.
MAINTENANCE
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors and back door, operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire and
loading information label. See page 424 for additional
information.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive
wear. See page 438 for additional information.
389
390
MAINTENANCE
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) See page 437 for additional information.
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip
− offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat
− looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
Engine continually runs hot; oil pressure gauge stays low.
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury.
MAINTENANCE
EMISSION INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On
−
Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re
− testing.
391
392
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
6
–
1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− yourself service precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
394
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
32X600b
61X001
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel and can be seen through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
61X008b
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A.ONLY)
17E002
INTRODUCTION
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.) (Type
A) or 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.) (Type B).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
Type A
61RY058
Type B
395
396
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
61X004m
1 Engine oil filler cap
2 Engine oil level dipstick
3 Brake fluid reservoir
4 Fuse box
5 Battery
6 Washer fluid tank
7 Condenser
8 Radiator
9 Engine coolant reservoir
10
11
Power steering fluid reservoir
Suspension fluid reservoir
DO−IT−YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems.
Performing do
− it
− yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do
− it
− yourself
maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 398.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe:
INTRODUCTION
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)
Right after driving, the engine compartment − the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power steering fluid reservoir and spark plug boots, etc. − will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, other fluids and spark plugs may also be hot.
If the engine is hot, do not remove the radiator cap or loosen the drain plugs to prevent burning yourself.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
397
398
INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.
Add only “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water
(for Canada).
If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, transfer oil and power steering fluid, or the transmission, transfer and power steering could be damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.
PARTS AND TOOLS
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do
− it
− yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Checking the engine oil level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil. For recommended
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
Checking brake fluid
Parts (if level is low):
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking power steering fluid
Parts (if level is low):
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking suspension fluid AHC
Parts (if level is low):
Suspension fluid AHC
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
INTRODUCTION
Checking battery condition
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage rating as original
Adding washer fluid
Parts:
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
399
400
INTRODUCTION
SECTION
6
–
2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
402
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
– GENERAL
Model
Type
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Drive belt tension
– FUEL
Fuel type
Octane rating
4.7L V8 (2UZ
−
FE)
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
94.0 X 84.0 mm (3.70 X 3.30 in.)
4664 cm
3
(284.6 cu.in.)
0.15
−
0.25 mm (0.006
−
0.010 in.)
0.25
−
0.35 mm (0.010
−
0.014 in.)
Automatic adjustment
Unleaded gasoline only
87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill with filter without filter
Oil grade
Recommended oil viscosity
6.8 L (7.2 qt., 6.0 lmp.qt.)
6.4 L (6.8 qt., 5.6 lmp.qt.)
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
SAE 5W
−
30
62sa08
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
403
404
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
Coolant type
15.4 L (16.3 qt., 13.6 lmp.qt.)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug – Make
– Gap
DENSO
NGK
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20 C (68 F):
– Charging rates
12.6
−
12.8 V
12.2
−
12.4 V
11.8
−
12.0 V
Fully charged
Half charged
Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off]
5A max.
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5
−
M93 in Canada.
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
ENGINE
Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
Quality gasoline
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 4 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance.
405
406
ENGINE
Cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
Gasoline quality
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue its use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Fuel tank capacity
96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 lmp.gal.)
ENGINE
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.
407
408
ENGINE
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed by high
− speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,
0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the engine oil level” described below.
ENGINE
USED ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal.
409
410
ENGINE
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
62X004d
62X001e
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean.
3. Standing up on the left side of the vehicle, reinsert the dipstick in the direction so that the “ENGINE OIL” on top should be read correctly and push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct.
1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end. If it is between the full line ( 5 ) and the low line ( 4 ), it is O.K.
NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle components.
62X002c
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low line, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows.
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp. qt.)
For the engine oil capacity, see “Specifications” on page 402.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
ENGINE
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil.
411
412
ENGINE
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W
−
30
Oil identification mark
g62035
62sa08
Outside temperature
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice, for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE 10W−30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at the next oil change.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine,
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
62X003d
ENGINE
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the radiator cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
1 Radiator cap 2 “FULL” line 3 “LOW” line
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the“FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL” line.
413
414
ENGINE
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non
− silicate, non
− amine, non
− nitrite, and non
− borate coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –35 C (–31 F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of
55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –42 C (–44 F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”, which has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with long
− life hybrid organic acid technology and has been specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system malfunction on Lexus vehicles.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself.
SPARK PLUGS
62R031c
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped spark plugs.
NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plug. Do not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth drivability.
ENGINE
415
416
ENGINE
SECTION
6
–
3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
418
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Front
Rear
Oil type
Oil viscosity
1.6 L (1.7 qt., 1.4 lmp.qt.)
3.3 L (3.5 qt., 2.9 lmp.qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL
−
5
Above
−
18 C (0 F): SAE 90
Below
−
18 C (0 F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W
−
90
– TRANSFER
Oil capacity
Oil type
Recommended oil viscosity
1.3 L (1.4 qt., 1.1 lmp.qt.)
Gear oil API GL
−
4 or GL
−
5
SAE 75W
−
90
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance
Pedal free play
Brake pad wear limit
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake adjustment
Fluid type
116 mm (4.57 in.) Min. * 1
1
−
6 mm (0.04
−
0.24 in.)
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
4
−
6 clicks * 2
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
* 1 : Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf.) with the engine running
* 2 : Parking brake adjustment when pulled with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.)
CHASSIS
– CHASSIS LUBRICATION
Wheel bearings
Steering knuckles
Propeller shafts
Spider
Slide yoke
Lithium base wheel bearing grease, NLGI No.2
Molybdenum
− disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Molybdenum
− disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
Fluid type
Up to 3.0 L (3.2 qt., 2.6 lmp.qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type WS” ( ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring maximum transmission performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
419
420
CHASSIS
– STEERING
Free play
Power steering fluid
– SUSPENSION
Fluid type
Less than 40 mm (1.6 in.)
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III
Suspension fluid AHC
– TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Normal driving
P275/60R18 111H
Front 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 29 psi)
Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi)
Spare 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi)
Trailer towing
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi)
Rear 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 35 psi)
Spare 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 35 psi)
18 x 8J
131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 424 through 443.
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
63X001b
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see−through reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the tank.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.
3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
“MAX” line.
CHASSIS
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
CAUTION
Take care when filling the brake fluid reservoir because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor.
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
421
422
CHASSIS
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID
63X003a
63X002a
Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III .
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60 C
−
80 C or 140 F
−
175 F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10 C
−
30 C or 50 F
−
85 F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.
1 If hot O.K. 2 If hot add 3 If cold O.K.
4 If cold add
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III to bring the level within the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.
When adding the power steering fluid, avoid spilling it. The generator under the power steering reservoir could be damaged if fluid is spilled on it.
CHASSIS
CHECKING SUSPENSION FLUID
AHC
63X007c
1 “MAX” line 2 “MIN” line
Under the unloaded condition, check the Suspension
Fluid AHC in the following way.
1. Start the engine and put the vehicle height in the “LO” (Low) mode and then “N” (Normal) mode.
2. Turn off the ignition switch about 30 seconds after the “N”
(Normal) mode indicator light comes on.
3. Make sure the fluid level is between “MAX” and “MIN”.
If the fluid level is lower than “MIN”, have suspension fluid AHC filled by your Lexus dealer.
423
424
CHASSIS
NOTICE
Only use the Suspension fluid AHC for the active height control suspension. If you fill other fluids such as brake fluid, power steering fluid, engine oil, etc., the active height control suspension could be damaged.
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
63x600b
Type A
Type B
CHASSIS
The recommended cold tire inflation pressures, tire size and the combined weight of occupants and cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the spare! The pressure for the spare tire should be 220 kPa
(2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi).
The following instructions for checking tire inflation pressure should be observed:
The inflation pressure should be checked only
when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.
425
CHASSIS
Inspection and adjustment procedure
63X601a
426
1
2
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center of the valve and release the air to adjust.
5. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation):
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from an overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
High tire pressure (overinflation):
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
CHASSIS
427
CHASSIS
Tire symbols
TIRE INFORMATION
63x602a
428
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
Location of tread wear indicators: For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 438.
Tire ply composition and materials : Plies mean a layer of rubber
− coated parallel cords.
Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire.
Summer tire or all season tire: An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,
see “Types of tires” on page 436.
Radial tires or bias−ply tires: A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias − ply tire.
CHASSIS
7
8
9
10
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Tires and wheels” on page 420.
Uniform tire quality grading: For details, see
“Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
429
430
CHASSIS
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire size
63SA11a 63x603
The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number (TIN)
1
2
“DOT” symbol
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3
4
5
6
7
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type code
(3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
1
Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)
2
3
Section width (in millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
4
5
6
7
Tire construction code
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (in inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
63x604a
1
2
3
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Name of each section of tire
63sa14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
9
10
11
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
CHASSIS
431
432
CHASSIS
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades − All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear − The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
−
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C − The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C − The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
CHASSIS
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure
Meaning tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
Recommended inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown on the sidewall of the tire cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle weight the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory
− installed equipment (whether installed or not) the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine the sum of —
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight
433
434
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Normal occupant weight
Production options weight
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
Intended outboard sidewall
Occupant distribution
Rim
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Meaning
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1 that follows the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
(a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that follows a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated nominal diameter of the bead seat
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Rim size designation
Rim type designation
Rim width
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Meaning rim diameter and width the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code nominal distance between rim flanges the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
5 through 10
2
3
2 in front
2 in front, 1 in second seat
435
436
CHASSIS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with.
1.
Summer tires
Summer tires are high
− speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow − covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow
− covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2.
All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish summer tires from
all season tires are described on page 428.
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals as this could result in loss of control and could cause death or serious injury.
ROTATING TIRES
63L020a
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment, out − of − balance wheels, or severe braking.
CHASSIS
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry place.
437
438
CHASSIS
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
When to replace your tires
63X006c
1
3
New tread 2 Tread wear indicator
Worn tread
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators show.
The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “
Δ
” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
The tires on your Lexus have built
− in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm
(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used.
This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater maximum load as the originally installed tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains.
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the
Certification Label. For details about the Certification
Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 394 and 428.
CHASSIS
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control. If you need to change from conventional tires to radial tires or vice versa, replace them as a set.
439
440
CHASSIS
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Snow tire installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 105 km/h (65 mph) with any type of snow tires.
Tire chain selection
63L009a
1 Side chain 2 Cross chain
Use the tire chains of correct size.
For 275/60R18 tires, use the following type chains.
A: Diameter of side chain mm (in.)
3.5
(0.14)
B: Diameter of cross chain 4.0
(0.16)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and chain is used, the chains could damage the vehicle body.
CHASSIS
Chain installation
Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 − 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur.
441
442
CHASSIS
REPLACING WHEELS
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have hidden structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and types, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km
(1000 miles).
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
CHASSIS
443
444
CHASSIS
SECTION
6
–
4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
445
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
− FUSE LOCATIONS
64X001K
446
1 Engine compartment
2 Driver’s side kick panel
3 Passenger’s side kick panel
− FUSES
64X500
64X604
Engine compartment
64x502b
Driver’s side kick panel
64X501b
Passenger’s side kick panel
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
1
2
Fuse
ABS NO.2
ABS NO.1
AMPERE
40
50
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
AHC
WIP−S
TOWING
MIR HTR
RR HTR
HAZ−TRN
ALT−S
NV−IR
FR FOG
TOWING
BRK
HEAD
CLNER
FR−IG
PANEL
TOWING
TAIL
50
7.5
30
15
10
15
7.5
20
15
30
20
10
7.5
30
CIRCUIT
Anti
− lock brake system
Anti
− lock brake system
Active height control suspension
(AHC)
No circuit
Trailer lights
Outside rear view mirror defogger
Rear air conditioning system
Emergency flashers, Turn signal lights
Charging system
Lexus night view system
Fog lights
Trailer lights
Headlight cleaner
Charging system
Instrument panel light
Trailer lights
447
448
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
17
18
19
20
Fuse
TAIL
BAT
TEL
AMP
21
EFI or
ECD No.1
22 AM2
AMPERE
15
30
7.5
30
25
15
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ETCS
HORN
HEAD
(RH−LWR)
HEAD
(LH−LWR)
HEAD
(RH−UPR)
HEAD
(LH−UPR)
AIR PUMP
A/F HTR
10
10
10
10
20
20
50
15
CIRCUIT
Parking lights, Tail lights
All components in “ECU
−
B2”
Lexus Link System
Audio system
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
All components in “IGN”
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Horns
Right
− hand headlight (low beam)
Left
− hand headlight (low beam)
Right
− hand headlight (high beam)
Left
− hand headlight (high beam)
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
No.
31
32
33
34
Fuse
PWR
OUTLET
CIG
ACC
AM1
35
36
DEFOG
AHC−B
37
38
FUEL
HTR
POWER
HTR
AHC−IG 39
40
41
EFI or
ECD No.2
GAUGE 1
42
43
44
ECU−IG 1
ECU−B1
DBL
LOCK
AMPERE
15
15
7.5
7.5
20
15
20
CIRCUIT
Power outlets
Cigarette lighter
Instrument panel light
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Rear window defogger
Active height control suspension
(AHC)
Fuel heater
7.5
20
10
10
10
10
15
Power heater
Active height control suspension
(AHC)
Emission control system
Gauges and meters
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Navigation system
Double lock system
45 A/C 15 Air conditioning system
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
46
47
48
49
Fuse
STOP
OBD−2
IDLE UP
LH SEAT
50
51
52
DOOR
SUN
ROOF
RR
WIPER
53
54
55
56
57
ECU−B2
DIFF
WASHER
RADIO
DOME
58
59
60
61
62
VGRS
P/W (FL)
P/W (RL)
WIPER
ECU−IG 2
AMPERE
15
7.5
7.5
30
25
CIRCUIT
Stop lights
On
− board diagnosis system
Idle
− up system
Power seat system
Power door lock system, Power windows
25 Electronic moon roof
15
10
20
15
10
10
40
20
20
25
10
Rear wiper system
Power door lock system, Power window
Four
− wheel drive system
Windshield washer
Audio system
Interior lights
Variable gear ratio steering system
Power window
Power window
Windshield wiper
Rear air conditioning system
449
450
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
63
64
65
Fuse
SEAT
HTR
GAUGE 2
MET
AMPERE
15
10
7.5
66
70
71
72
73
IGN
67 SECURITY
68 P/W (RR)
69 P/W (FR)
BATT
CHARGE
TIL & TEL
RR A/C
RH SEAT
7.5
7.5
20
20
30
20
30
30
CIRCUIT
Seat heater
Back
− up lights
Gauges and meters
Multiport fuel injection system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Theft deterrent system
Power window
Power window
Trailer charging system
Tilt and telescopic steering
Rear air conditioning system
Power seat system
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office.
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary.
If you accidentally to swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Checking battery exterior
64X004d
1 Terminals 2 Hold−down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections, cracks, or loose hold−down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts
−
but do not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold
− down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case.
451
452
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned off before performing maintenance.
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it.
If the battery terminal is disconnected or the battery is run down...
The variable gear ratio steering system is reset temporarily and “VGRS” warning light flashes after you reconnect the battery terminal. In this case, you should turn off the light and return the system to normal. To return the system to normal, see “Variable gear ratio steering system” on page
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not operate correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery with the moon roof slide
− opened or tilted up. In any of these cases, you should return the moon roof to normal. To return the moon
roof to normal, see “Moon roof” on page 95.
Checking battery condition
(a) Checking by fluid level lines
64X005c
1 Upper line 2 Lower line
The fluid (electrolyte) level must be between the upper and lower lines.
When checking the fluid level, look at all six cells, not just one or two.
If the level is lower than the lower line, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
(b) Checking by indicator
64X006a
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1 BLUE
−
Good condition.
2 WHITE
−
Charging necessary. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
3 RED
−
Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode causing personal injuries.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, make sure all accessories are turned off.
453
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
64X008a
Engine compartment
1 Spare fuses 2 Pull−out tool
64X503
Passenger’s side kick panel
1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
64X007b
454
Driver’s side kick panel
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L013 64G008a
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out with the pull−out tool and check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
Good Blown a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that you know is good.
b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the “DOME” or “CIG” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close to the rating as possible. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clips.
455
456
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
61X513a
Engine compartment
64g104
Good Blown
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
NOTICE
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for replacement. Never install an ordinary wire − even for a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.
457
458
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ADDING WASHER FLUID
64X603a
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not fill washer fluid over the “NORMAL” level.
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
The tail lights and stop lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any LED burns out, we recommend you take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light inspected as soon as possible.
If two or more LEDs in a stop light burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws(SAE).
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
LIGHT LOCATION
64x015e
Light Bulbs Bulb No.
W
1 Headlights (High beam) 9005 60
2 Headlights (Low beam)
3 Parking and front side marker lights
4 Fog light
5 Front turn signal lights
9006
−
−
−
55
5
55
21
Type
A
B
D
C
F
459
460
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64X600a 64X516b
Light Bulbs
1 Stop/tail lights
2 Tail lights
3 License plate lights
4 Back
− up lights
5 Rear turn signal lights
Bulb No.
W
−
6.2/0.5
−
0.4
168 5
921 18
7440 21
Type
G
G
D
D
D
Light Bulbs
1 Vanity light
2 Personal light
3 Personal light
Interior light
4 Interior light
5 Door courtesy light
6 Glove box light
Bulb No.
W
−
3
−
−
−
−
5
8
8
8
−
−
3
1.4
Type
E
F
D
D
E
E
E
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H1 halogen bulbs
C: H3 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs
E: Double end bulbs
F: Single end bulbs
G: LEDs (Light
− emitting Diodes)
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
461
462
SECTION
6
–
5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheelbase
Tread – Front
– Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + cargo)
Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight)
*: Unladen vehicle
– FUEL TANK
Capacity
4890 mm (192.5 in.)
1940 mm (76.4 in.)
1850 mm (72.8 in.)*
2850 mm (112.2 in.)
1620 mm (63.8 in.)
1615 mm (63.6 in.)
545 kg (1200 lb.)
2948 kg (6500 lb.)
96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 lmp.gal.)
BODY
463
464
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long
− term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard
− to
− reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an extended period of time, even though other parts of the vehicle are dry.
Components of the vehicle which are prevented from quick
− drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient temperature.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition, observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing them. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.
See “Washing and waxing” on page 465 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Full
− size shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Lexus dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the shields if they are recommended for your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
BODY
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect
When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud
Hand−washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not warm to the touch.
CAUTION
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
465
466
BODY
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car
− wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard
−
let the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high
− pressure car wash, for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substances splash an ornament, be sure to wash them off with water and check if the ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding faces are soft.
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub them with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces.
3. Rinse thoroughly
−
dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard
−
you might scratch the paint.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.
Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may cause damage.
Automatic car wash
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is retracted before driving your vehicle through an automatic car wash.
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle.
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car
− cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure the washer nozzles do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses. If you accidentally put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or wash it off.
BODY
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Leather−trimmed interior
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened with 5 % solution of neutral detergent for wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.
467
468
BODY
NOTICE
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
Non−leather trim (Part of door panels)
The non−leather trim may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the non
− leather trim. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming
− type cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturer ’s instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water
−
the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
Use a good foam−type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts − it may weaken them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
BODY
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Audio
System, Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer them.
469
470
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll
− free: 1
−
800
−
25
−
LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll
− free at 1
−
800
−
424
−
9393 (or
366
−
0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
KEYS AND DOORS
471
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project